Volvo S80 2009 Owners Manual PDF

1 of 290
1 of 290

Summary of Content for Volvo S80 2009 Owners Manual PDF

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:56:36+01:00; Page 1

henrikrosenqvist

VOLVO S80

Owners Manual

DEAR VOLVO OWNER THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO

We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your

Volvo. The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of

you and your passengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in the

world. Your Volvo has also been designed to satisfy all current

safety and environmental requirements.

In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we recommend

that you familiarise yourself with the equipment, instructions

and maintenance information contained in this owner's manual.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 1

henrikrosenqvist

Table of contents

2 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

00 00 Introduction

Important information................................. 6

Volvo and the environment......................... 9

01 01 Safety

Seatbelts .................................................. 14

Airbag system (SRS - Airbag)................... 17

Activating/deactivating the airbag*........... 20

Side airbags (SIPS bags) ......................... 22

Inflatable Curtain (IC) ............................... 24

WHIPS ...................................................... 25

When the systems deploy ........................ 27

Safety mode.............................................. 28

Child safety............................................... 29 02 02 Locks and alarm

Remote control key/key blade.................. 40

Privacy locking*......................................... 45

Battery replacement, remote control key/ PCC*......................................................... 46

Keyless drive*............................................ 48

Locking/unlocking..................................... 50

Child safety locks...................................... 54

Alarm*........................................................ 55

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 2

henrikrosenqvist

Table of contents

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 3

03 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls.......................... 60

Instruments and controls - Executive ...... 69

Key positions............................................ 70

Seats......................................................... 71

Seats - Executive...................................... 75

Steering wheel.......................................... 77

Lighting..................................................... 78

Wipers and washing.................................. 87

Windows, rearview and door mirrors........ 89

Power sunroof*......................................... 93

Starting the engine.................................... 95

Starting the engine Flexifuel................... 97

Starting the engine external battery....... 99

Gearboxes............................................... 100

All-wheel drive AWD*........................... 104

Foot brake............................................... 105

Parking brake.......................................... 107

HomeLink EU*....................................... 110

04 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages............................. 116

Climate control........................................ 121

Fuel-driven engine block heater and pas- senger compartment heater*.................. 129

Fuel-driven additional heater*................. 132

Audio system.......................................... 133

RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system - Dual Screen* .......................................... 144

Trip computer......................................... 149

Compass*............................................... 151

DSTC Stability and traction control sys- tem.......................................................... 152

Adapting driving characteristics............. 153

Cruise control*........................................ 154

Adaptive cruise control*.......................... 155

Distance Alert.......................................... 161

Collision Warning with Auto Brake*........ 164

Driver Alert System DAC*..................... 169

Driver Alert System - LDW*..................... 172

Park Assist*............................................. 175

BLIS* Blind Spot Information System. . 178

Comfort inside the passenger compart- ment........................................................ 182

Comfort inside the passenger compart- ment - Executive..................................... 185

04 Bluetooth handsfree*.............................. 186

Built-in phone*........................................ 191

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 3

henrikrosenqvist

Table of contents

4 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

05 05 During your journey

Recommendations during driving........... 198

Refuelling................................................ 200

Fuel......................................................... 201

Loading................................................... 204

Cargo area ............................................. 205

Warning triangle*..................................... 207

Driving with a trailer................................ 208

Towing and recovery.............................. 213 06 06 Maintenance and

specifications

Engine compartment............................... 218

Lamps..................................................... 223

Wiper blades and washer fluid................ 230

Battery..................................................... 232

Fuses....................................................... 235

Wheels and tyres.................................... 244

Car care.................................................. 259

Type designations................................... 263

Specifications......................................... 265

Type approval......................................... 277 07 07 Alphabetical Index

Alphabetical Index.................................. 278

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 4

henrikrosenqvist

Table of contents

5

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 5

henrikrosenqvist

Introduction

Important information

6

Reading the Owner's Manual

Introduction A good way of getting to know your new car is

to read the owner's manual, ideally before your

first journey. This will give you the opportunity

to familiarise yourself with new functions, to

see how best to handle the car in different sit-

uations, and to make the best use of all the

car's features. Please pay attention to the

safety instructions contained in the manual.

The equipment described in the owner's man-

ual is not present in all cars. In addition to

standard equipment, this manual also

describes options (factory fitted equipment)

and certain accessories (retrofitted extra

equipment). If you are uncertain over what is

standard or option/accessory then contact

your Volvo dealer.

Volvo cars are adapted for the varying require-

ments of different markets, as well as for

national or local legal requirements and regu-

lations.

The specifications, design features and illus-

trations in this owner's manual are not binding.

We reserve the right to make modifications

without prior notice.

Volvo Car Corporation

Option All types of option/accessory are marked with

an asterisk .

The range of options/accessories for the dif-

ferent car models varies depending on the mar-

ket. The majority of options are factory fitted

and cannot be retrofitted, accessories are ret-

rofitted.

Contact your authorised Volvo dealer for more

information.

Special texts

WARNING

Warning texts advise of a risk of personal injury.

IMPORTANT

Important texts advise of a risk of material damage.

NOTE

NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate the use of features and functions for exam- ple.

Footnote There is footnote information in the owner's

manual that is located at the bottom of the

page. This information is an addition to the text

that it refers to via a number. If the footnote

refers to text in a table then letters are used

instead of numbers for referral.

Message texts There are displays in the car that show text

messages. These text messages are high-

lighted in the owner's manual by means of the

text being slightly larger and printed in grey.

Examples of this are in menu texts and mes-

sage texts on the information display (e.g.

Audio settings).

Decals The car contains different types of decal which

are designed to convey important information

in a simple and clear manner. The decals in the

car have the following descending degree of

importance for the warning/information.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 6

henrikrosenqvist

Introduction

Important information

7

Warning for personal injury

G031596

Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field,

white text/image on black message field. Used

to indicate the presence of danger which, if the

warning is ignored, may result in serious per-

sonal injury or fatality.

Risk of property damage

G031597

White ISO symbols and white text/image on

black or blue warning field and message field.

Used to indicate the presence of danger which,

if the warning is ignored, may result in damage

to property.

Information

G031600

White ISO symbols and white text/image on

black message field.

Procedure lists Procedures where action must be taken in a

certain sequence are numbered in the owner's

manual.

When there is a series of illustrations for

step-by-step instructions each step is

numbered in the same way as the corres-

ponding illustration.

There are numbered lists with letters adja-

cent to the series of illustrations where the

order of the instructions is not significant.

Arrows appear numbered and unnum-

bered and are used to illustrate a move-

ment.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 7

henrikrosenqvist

Introduction

Important information

8

If there is no series of illustrations for step-by-

step instructions then the different steps are

numbered with normal numbers.

Position lists Red circles containing a number are used

in overview images where different com-

ponents are pointed out. The number

recurs in the position list featured in con-

nection with the illustration that describes

the item.

Bulleted lists A bulleted list is used when there is a list of

points in the owner's manual.

Example:

Coolant

Engine oil

To be continued This symbol is located furthest down to the

right when a section continues on the next

double-page spread.

Recording data

One or more of the computers in your Volvo are

capable of recording detailed information. This

information is intended for use in research to

enhance safety and for diagnosing faults in

some of the in-car systems. The data may

include details regarding seatbelt use by the

driver and passengers, the functions of various

vehicle systems and modules, and status infor-

mation about the engine, throttle, steering,

brakes and other systems. This data can also

include details of the way the car is driven. This

type of information can include, without being

limited to, specific details such as vehicle

speed, the use of the brake and accelerator

pedals and steering wheel position. This latter

type of data can be stored for a limited period

while the car is being driven and subsequently

during a collision or a near-collision. Volvo Car

Corporation will not disclose the stored infor-

mation without consent. However, Volvo Car

Corporation may be forced to disclose the

information due to national legislation. Volvo

Car Corporation and its authorised workshops

may also read and use the information.

Accessories and extra equipment

The incorrect connection and installation of

accessories can negatively affect the car's

electrical system. Certain accessories only

function when their associated software is

installed in the car's computer system. Always

contact an authorised Volvo workshop before

installing accessories which are connected to

or affect the electrical system.

Information on the Internet

At www.volvocars.com there is further infor-

mation concerning your car.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 8

henrikrosenqvist

Introduction

Volvo and the environment

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 9

Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy

G 00

00 00

Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corpo-

ration's core values which influence all opera-

tions. We also believe that our customers share

our consideration for the environment.

Your Volvo complies with strict international

environmental standards and is also manufac-

tured in one of the cleanest and most resource-

efficient plants in the world. Volvo Car Corpo-

ration has global ISO certification, which

includes the environmental standard ISO

14001 covering all factories and several of our

other units. We also set requirements for our

partners so that they work systematically with

environmental issues.

EPI (Environmental Product Information) is

supplied for all Volvo models. Here you can see

how the environment is affected during the

entire lifecycle of the car.

Read more at www.volvocars.com/EPI.

Fuel consumption Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption

in each of their respective classes. Lower fuel

consumption generally results in lower emis-

sion of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.

It is possible for the driver to influence fuel con-

sumption. For more information read under the

heading, Reducing environmental impact.

Efficient emission control Your Volvo is manufactured following the con-

cept "Clean inside and out" a concept that

encompasses a clean interior environment as

well as highly efficient emission control. In

many cases the exhaust emissions are well

below the applicable standards.

Clean air in the passenger compartment A passenger compartment filter prevents dust

and pollen from entering the passenger com-

partment via the air intake.

A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS* (Inte-

rior Air Quality System) ensures that the incom-

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 9

henrikrosenqvist

Introduction

Volvo and the environment

10

ing air is cleaner than the air in the traffic

outside.

The system consists of an electronic sensor

and a carbon filter. The incoming air is moni-

tored continuously and if there is an increase

in the level of certain unhealthy gases such as

carbon monoxide then the air intake is closed.

Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic,

queues and tunnels for example.

The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level ozone

and hydrocarbons is prevented by the carbon

filter.

Textile standard The interior of a Volvo is designed to be plea-

sant and comfortable, even for people with

contact allergies and for asthma sufferers.

Extreme attention has been given to choosing

environmentally-compatible materials. This

means that they also fulfil the requirements in

the Oeko-Tex 100 standard 1, a major advance

towards a healthier passenger compartment

environment.

Oeko-Tex certification covers seatbelts, car-

pets and fabrics for example. The leather in the

upholstery undergoes chromium-free tanning

with plant substances and fulfils the certifica-

tion requirements.

Volvo workshops and the environment Regular maintenance creates the conditions

for a long service life and low fuel consumption

for your car. In this way you contribute to a

cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops

are entrusted with the service and mainte-

nance of your car it becomes part of our sys-

tem. We make clear demands regarding the

way in which our workshops are designed in

order to prevent spills and discharges into the

environment. Our workshop staff have the

knowledge and the tools required to guarantee

good environmental care.

Reducing environmental impact You can easily help reduce environmental

impact, for example, by driving economically

and by servicing and maintaining the car

according to the instructions in the owner's

manual.

The following advice will help you to do your bit

for the environment: (for further advice on how

you can reduce environmental impact and

drive economically, see pages 257, 198).

Decrease fuel consumption by choosing ECO tyre pressure, see page 257.

A roof load and ski box increase air resis- tance, leading to higher fuel consumption. Remove them directly after use.

Remove unnecessary items from the car. The greater the load the higher the fuel consumption.

If the car is equipped with an engine block heater, always use it before starting from cold. This reduces fuel consumption and exhaust emissions.

Drive gently and avoid braking too hard.

Drive in the highest gear possible. Low engine speeds result in lower fuel con- sumption.

Use engine braking to slow down.

Avoid letting the engine idle. Pay attention to local regulations. Switch off the engine when stationary for longer periods.

Always dispose of environmentally hazar- dous waste, such as batteries and oils, in an environmentally safe manner. If uncer- tain about disposal, consult an authorised Volvo workshop for advice.

Service your car regularly.

High speed increases consumption con- siderably due to increased wind resis- tance. A doubling of speed increases wind resistance 4 times.

These hints will help reduce fuel consumption

without increasing travel time or lessening the

enjoyment of driving. Apart from being kind to

1 More information on www.oekotex.com

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 10

henrikrosenqvist

Introduction

Volvo and the environment

11

your car, you'll be saving money - and the

Earth's resources.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 11

henrikrosenqvist

G 02

08 71

12 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Seatbelts ................................................................................................ 14

Airbag system (SRS - Airbag)................................................................. 17

Activating/deactivating the airbag*......................................................... 20

Side airbags (SIPS bags) ....................................................................... 22

Inflatable Curtain (IC) .............................................................................. 24

WHIPS .................................................................................................... 25

When the systems deploy ...................................................................... 27

Safety mode............................................................................................ 28

Child safety............................................................................................. 29

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 12

henrikrosenqvist

01 SAFETY

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 13

henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

Seatbelts01

14 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General information

G 02

09 95

Heavy braking can have serious consequences

if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that all

passengers use their seatbelts.

It is important that the seatbelt lies against the

body so it can provide maximum protection.

Do not lean the backrest too far back. The

seatbelt is designed to protect in a normal

seating position.

Putting on a seatbelt Pull the seatbelt out slowly and secure it by

pressing the buckle into the lock. A loud "click"

indicates that the seatbelt has locked.

The buckles only fit the intended lock in the rear

seat*.

Releasing the seatbelt Press the red lock button and then let the seat-

belt retract. If the seatbelt does not retract fully,

feed the seatbelt in by hand so that it does not

hang loose.

The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn:

if it is pulled out too quickly.

during braking and acceleration.

if the car leans heavily.

Keep in mind the following:

do not use clips or anything else that can prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly.

ensure that the seatbelt is not twisted or caught on anything.

the hip strap must be positioned low down (not over the abdomen).

tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling the diagonal shoulder belt as in the pre- ceding illustration.

WARNING

The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat- belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.

WARNING

Each seatbelt is designed for only one per- son.

WARNING

Never modify or repair the seatbelts your- self. Contact an authorised Volvo work- shop.

If a seatbelt has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of the protective characteristics of the seat- belt may have been lost, even if it appears to be undamaged. In addition, replace the seatbelt if the belt is worn or damaged. The new seatbelt must be type-approved and intended for installation in the same position as the replaced seatbelt.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 14

henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

Seatbelts 01

15

Seatbelts and pregnancy

G 02

09 98

The seatbelt should always be worn during

pregnancy. But it is then crucial that it be worn

in the correct way. The diagonal section should

wrap over the shoulder then be routed between

the breasts and to the side of the abdomen.

The lap section should lay flat over the thighs

and as low as possible under the abdomen.

It must never be allowed to ride upward.

Remove all slack from the seatbelt and ensure

that it fits close to the body. In addition, check

that there are no twists in the seatbelt.

As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers

should adjust their seats and steering wheel

such that they can easily maintain control of the

vehicle as they drive (which means that they

must be able to easily operate the foot pedals

and steering wheel). They should strive to posi-

tion the seat with as large a distance as possi-

ble between their abdomen and the steering

wheel.

Seatbelt reminder

G 01

77 26

Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten

their seatbelts by means of an audio and visual

reminder. The audio reminder is speed

dependent, and in some cases time depend-

ent. The visual reminder is located in the roof

console and the combined instrument panel.

Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt

reminder system.

Rear seat The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two

subfunctions:

Provides information on which seatbelts are being used in the rear seat. The mes- sage is shown in the information display when the seatbelts are being used or when a rear door is opened. The message is automatically cleared after approx. 30 sec- onds or can be acknowledged manually by pressing the direction indicator lever's READ button.

Provides a warning if one of the rear seat- belts is unfastened during travel. This warning takes the form of a message on the information display along with the audio/visual signal. The warning stops when the seatbelt is re-fastened, or it can also be acknowledged manually by press- ing the READ button.

The message on the information display show-

ing which seatbelts are in use is always avail-

able. Press the READ button to see stored

messages.

Certain markets An acoustic signal and indicator lamp remind

the driver if not wearing a seatbelt to use one.

At low speed, the audio reminder will sound for

the first 6 seconds.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 15

henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

Seatbelts01

16

Seatbelt tensioner

All the seatbelts are equipped with belt ten-

sioners. A mechanism in the seatbelt tensioner

tightens the seatbelt in the event of a suffi-

ciently violent collision. The seatbelt then pro-

vides more effective restraint for the occu-

pants.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 16

henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

Airbag system (SRS - Airbag) 01

17

Warning symbol on the combined instrument panel

o 0 1

G 02

10 10

The airbag system is continuously monitored

by the system's control module. The warning

symbol in the combined instrument panel illu-

minates when the remote control key is in posi-

tion II or III. The symbol goes out after approx.

6 seconds provided the airbag system is fault-

free.

WARNING

If the warning symbol for the airbag system remains illuminated or illuminates while driv- ing, it means that the airbag system does not have full functionality. The symbol indi- cates a fault in the seatbelt tensioner sys- tem, SIPS, the IC system or another fault in the SRS system. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately.

As well as the warning symbol, a message may

appear on the information display in appropri-

ate cases. If the warning symbol malfunctions,

the warning triangle illuminates and SRS

airbag Service required or SRS Airbag

Service urgent appears in the display. Con-

tact an authorised Volvo workshop immedi-

ately.

Overview, airbag system

G 01

86 65

SRS system, left-hand drive.

G 01

86 66

SRS system, right-hand drive.

The SRS system consists of airbags and sen-

sors. A sufficiently violent collision trips the

sensors and the airbag(s) are inflated with hot

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 17

henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

Airbag system (SRS - Airbag)01

18

gas. To cushion the impact, the airbag deflates

when compressed. When this occurs, smoke

escapes into the car. This is completely nor-

mal. The entire process, including inflation and

deflation of the airbag, occurs within tenths of

a second.

WARNING

Repairs must only be performed by an authorised Volvo workshop. Any interfer- ence in the airbag system could cause mal- function and result in serious personal injury.

NOTE

The sensors react differently depending on the course of the collision and whether or not the seatbelts on the driver and passen- ger side are used.

It is therefore possible that only one (or none) of the airbags may inflate in a colli- sion. The airbag system senses the force of the collision on the car and adapts accord- ingly so that one or more airbags are deployed.

The capacity of the airbags is also adapted to the collision force to which the vehicle is subjected.

G 02

10 13

Location of the front passenger airbag in a left- hand drive car.

G 02

10 14

Location of the front passenger airbag in a right- hand drive car.

Airbag on the driver's side

G 02

10 11

The car has an SRS airbag (Supplemental

Restraint System) on the driver's side to sup-

plement the protection afforded by the seat-

belt. This airbag is fitted into the centre of the

steering wheel. The steering wheel is marked

SRS AIRBAG.

WARNING

The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat- belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 18

henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

Airbag system (SRS - Airbag) 01

19

Passenger airbag

G 02

18 37

The car has an airbag to supplement the pro-

tection afforded by the seatbelt on the passen-

ger side. This airbag is folded up into a

compartment above the glovebox. Its cover

panel is marked SRS AIRBAG.

WARNING

To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag deploys, passengers must sit as upright as possible with their feet on the floor and backs against the backrest. Seatbelts must be secured.

WARNING

Do not put objects in front of or above the dashboard where the passenger airbag is located.

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag is activated 1.

Never allow a child to stand or sit in front of the front passenger seat. No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit in the front pas- senger seat if the airbag is activated.

Failure to follow the advice given above could endanger the life of the child.

Label Airbag

G 03

22 44

Label for airbag located on door pillar.

1 For information on how to activate/deactivate the airbag, see page 20

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 19

henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

Activating/deactivating the airbag*01

20 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Key switch off - PACOS

General information The airbag for the front passenger seat can be

deactivated if the car is equipped with a switch,

PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch). For

information on how to activate/deactivate, see

under the heading Activating/deactivating.

Key switch off/switch The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS)

is located on the passenger end of the instru-

ment panel and is accessible when the pas-

senger door is open, (see under the following

heading, "Switch PACOS"). Check that the

switch is in the required position. Volvo rec-

ommends that the remote control key's key

blade be used to change position.

For information on the key blade, see

page 43.

WARNING

Failure to follow the advice given above could endanger the life of passengers in the car.

WARNING

If the car is equipped with a front passenger airbag, but has no switch (PACOS, Passen- ger Airbag Cut Off Switch), then the airbag is always activated.

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag

is activated and the symbol in the roof console is illuminated. Failure to follow this advice could endanger the life of the child.

WARNING

Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas- senger seat if the message in the roof panel (see page 21) indicates that the airbag is deactivated and if the warning symbol for the airbag system is also displayed in the combined instrument panel. This indicates that there has been a severe malfunction. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately.

Activating/deactivating

G 01

90 30

Switch location.

The airbag is activated. With the switch in

this position, persons taller than 140 cm

can sit in the front passenger seat, but

never children in a child seat or on a

booster cushion.

The airbag is deactivated. With the switch

in this position, children in a child seat or

on a booster cushion can sit in the front

passenger seat, but never persons taller

than 140 cm.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 20

henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

Activating/deactivating the airbag* 01

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 21

WARNING

Activated airbag (passenger seat):

Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion on the front passenger seat when the airbag is activated. This applies to everyone shorter than 140 cm.

Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):

No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat when the airbag is deactivated.

Failure to follow the advice given above could endanger life.

Messages

2

2

G 01

77 24

Indicator in the roof console showing that the pas- senger airbag is deactivated.

A text message and a symbol in the roof panel

indicate that the airbag for the front passenger

seat is deactivated (see preceding illustration).

G 01

78 00

Indicator in the roof console showing that the pas- senger airbag is activated.

A warning symbol in the roof panel indicates

that the airbag for the front passenger seat is

activated (see preceding illustration).

NOTE

When the remote control key is turned to ignition position II or III the warning symbol for the airbag is shown in the combined instrument panel for approx. 6 seconds (see page 17).

Following which, the indicator in the roof console is illuminated showing the correct status for the front passenger seat airbag. For more information on the remote control key's different ignition positions, see page 70.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 21

henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

Side airbags (SIPS bags) 01

22

Side airbag

G 02

06 94

In a side impact collision a large proportion of

the collision force is transferred by the SIPS

(Side Impact Protection System) to beams, pil-

lars, the floor, the roof and other structural

parts of the body. The side airbags at the driv-

er's and front passenger seats protect the

chest area and the hip and are an important

part of the SIPS.

The SIPS bag system consists of two main

components, side airbag and sensors. The

side airbags are located in the front seat backr-

ests.

WARNING

Repairs must only be performed by an authorised Volvo workshop. Any inter- ference in the SIPS bag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.

Do not put objects in the area between the outside of the seat and the door panel, since this area is required by the side airbag.

Use only seat covers approved by Volvo. Other seat covers may impede the operation of the side airbags.

The side airbag is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.

Child seats and side airbags The protection provided by the car to children

seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion

is not diminished by the side airbag.

A child seat or booster cushion can be placed

on the front passenger seat provided that the

car does not have an activated 1 passenger

airbag.

Location

G 02

43 77

Driver's seat, left-hand drive.

G 02

43 78

Front passenger seat, left-hand drive.

The SIPS bag system consists of side airbags

and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips

1 For information on activating/deactivating the airbag, see page 20.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 22

henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

Side airbags (SIPS bags) 01

23

the sensors and the side airbags are inflated.

The airbag inflates between the occupant and

the door panel and thereby cushions the initial

impact. The airbag deflates when compressed

by the collision. The side airbag is normally only

deployed on the side of the collision.

Label

G 03

22 54

Label for side airbag located on door pillar.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 23

henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

Inflatable Curtain (IC) 01

24

Properties

G 02

06 65

The inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is a

supplement to the SIPS and SRS airbags. It is

fitted in the headlining along both sides of the

roof and protects the car's outer seats. A suf-

ficiently violent collision trips the sensors and

the inflatable curtain is inflated. The inflatable

curtain helps to prevent the driver and passen-

gers from striking their heads on the inside of

the car during a collision.

WARNING

Never hang or attach heavy items onto the handles in the roof. The hook is only designed for light clothing (not for solid objects such as umbrellas for example).

Do not screw or install anything onto the car's headlining, door pillars or side panels. This could compromise the intended pro- tection. Only ever use Volvo genuine parts that are approved for placement in these areas.

WARNING

Do not load the car higher than 50 mm under the top edge of the side windows. Other- wise, the intended protection of the inflat- able curtain, which is concealed in the headlining, may be compromised.

WARNING

The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the seatbelts.

Always use a seatbelt.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 24

henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

WHIPS 01

25

Protection against whiplash injury WHIPS

G 02

10 18

The whiplash protection system (WHIPS) con-

sists of energy absorbing backrests and spe-

cially designed head restraints in the front

seats. The system is actuated by a rear-end

collision, where the angle and speed of the col-

lision, and the nature of the colliding vehicle all

have an influence.

WARNING

The WHIPS system is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.

Properties of the seat When the WHIPS system is deployed, the front

seat backrests are lowered backward to alter

the seating position of the driver and front seat

passenger. This reduces the risk of whiplash

injury.

WARNING

Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS system yourself. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

WHIPS system and child seats/cushions The protection provided by the car to children

seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion

is not diminished by the WHIPS system.

Correct seating position For the best possible protection, the driver and

front seat passenger should sit in the centre of

the seat with as little space as possible

between the head and the head restraint.

WARNING

If a seat has been subjected to extreme forces, such as due to a rear-end collision, the WHIPS system must be checked by an authorised Volvo workshop.

Part of the WHIPS system's protective capacity may have been lost even if the seats appear to be undamaged. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop to have the sys- tem checked even after a minor rear-end collision.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 25

henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

WHIPS01

26

Do not obstruct the WHIPS system

G 02

18 42

Objects behind driver's/passenger seat.

WARNING

Do not squeeze rigid objects between the rear seat cushion and the front seat back- rest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the function of the WHIPS system.

G 01

85 67

Objects in the rear seat.

WARNING

If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the corresponding front seat must be moved forward so that it does not touch the folded backrest.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 26

henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

When the systems deploy 01

27

When the systems deploy

System Triggered

Seatbelt tensioner,

front seat

In a frontal collision

and or side-impact

accident and or

rear-end collision

Seatbelt tensioner,

rear seat

In a frontal collision

Airbags (SRS) In a frontal colli-

sionA

Side airbags (SIPS) In a side-impact

accidentA

Inflatable Curtain IC In a side-impact

accidentA

Whiplash protection

WHIPS

In a rear-end colli-

sion

A The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a col- lision without airbag deployment. A number of factors such as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed of the car, the angle of the collision etc. affects how the different safety systems of the car are activated.

If the airbags have deployed, the following is

recommended:

Have the car transported to an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not drive with deployed airbags.

Let an authorised Volvo workshop replace components in the car's safety system.

Always contact a doctor.

NOTE

The SRS, SIPS, IC and belt tensioner sys- tems are deployed only once during a colli- sion.

WARNING

The airbag control module is located in the centre console. If the centre console is drenched with water or other liquid, discon- nect the battery cables. Do not attempt to start the car since the airbags may deploy. Have the car transported to an authorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING

Never drive with deployed airbags. They can make steering difficult. Other safety systems may also be damaged. The smoke and dust created when the airbags are deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/ injury after intensive exposure. In case of irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid deployment sequence and airbag fabric may cause friction and skin burns.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 27

henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

Safety mode01

28

Reduced functionality

G 02

10 62

If the car is involved in a collision, the text

Safety mode See manual may appear on the

information display. This means that the car

has reduced functionality. Safety mode is a

protective state that is enforced when the col-

lision may have damaged any of the car's vital

functions, such as the fuel lines, sensors for

one of the safety systems, or the brake system.

Attempting to start the car First, check that no fuel is leaking from the car.

There must be no smell of fuel either.

If everything seems normal and you have

checked for indications of fuel leakage, you

may attempt to start the car.

Firstly, remove the remote control key and then

reinsert it. The car's electronics will then try to

reset themselves to normal mode. Then try to

start the car. If the message Safety mode See

manual is still shown on the display then the

car must not be driven or towed, but a vehicle

recovery service used instead. Even if the car

appears to be driveable, hidden damage may

make the car impossible to control once mov-

ing.

Moving the car If Normal mode is shown after Safety mode

See manual has been reset, the car can be

moved carefully out of a dangerous position.

Do not move the car further than necessary.

WARNING

Never attempt to repair your car or reset the electronics yourself if the car has been in safety mode. This could result in personal injury or the car not functioning as normal. Always allow an authorised Volvo workshop to check and restore the car to normal sta- tus after Safety mode See manual has been displayed.

WARNING

Never, under any circumstances, attempt to restart the car if it smells of fuel when the Safety mode message is displayed. Leave the car at once.

WARNING

If the car is in safety mode it must not be towed. It must be transported to an author- ised Volvo workshop.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 28

henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

Child safety 01

29

Children should sit comfortably and safely

The position of a child in the car and the choice

of equipment are dictated by the child's weight

and size, for more information, see page 30.

NOTE

Regulations regarding the placement of children in cars vary from country to coun- try. Check what does apply.

Children of all ages and sizes must always sit

correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child

to sit on the knee of a passenger.

Volvo's own child safety equipment is

designed for your car. Use Volvo genuine

equipment to best ensure that the mounting

points and attachments are correctly posi-

tioned and are sufficiently strong.

NOTE

In the event of questions when fitting child safety products, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions.

Child seats

G 02

07 39

Child seats and airbags are not compatible.

Volvo has child safety products that are

designed for and tested by Volvo.

NOTE

When using child safety products it is important to read the installation instruc- tions included.

Do not attach the straps for the child seat to

the horizontal adjustment bar, springs, rails or

beams under the seat. Sharp edges can dam-

age the straps.

Allow the back of the child seat to rest against

the dashboard. This applies to cars without a

passenger airbag, or where the airbag is deac-

tivated.

Location of child seats

You may place:

a child seat/booster cushion on the pas- senger seat, provided the passenger air-

bag is not activated 1.

a rear-facing child seat in the rear seat that uses the passenger seat backrest as sup- port.

Always place a child in the rear seat if the pas-

senger airbag is activated. A child sitting on the

front passenger seat could suffer serious injury

if the airbag deploys.

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated.

No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated.

Failure to follow the advice given above could endanger the life of the child.

1 For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS), see page 20.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 29

henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

Child safety01

30

WARNING

Booster cushions/child seats with steel braces or some other design that could rest on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must not be used, as they could cause the seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.

Do not allow the upper section of the child seat to rest against the windscreen.

Label Airbag

Label located on instrument panel end face on the passenger side.

Recommended child seats 2

Weight/Age Front seat Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 0

max. 10 kg (0-9 months)

Group 0+

max 13 kg

Volvo Child seat rear-facing child

seat, secured with the car's seat-

belt and straps.

Type approval: E5 03135

Volvo Child seat rear-facing child seat,

secured with the car's seatbelt, straps

and support legs.

Type approval: E5 03135

Volvo Child seat rear-facing child seat,

secured with the car's seatbelt, straps

and support legs.

Type approval: E5 03135

Britax Baby Safe Plus rear-facing

child seat, secured with the ISOFIX

fixture system.

Type approval: E1 03301146

Britax Baby Safe Plus rear-facing child

seat, secured with the ISOFIX fixture

system.

Type approval: E1 03301146

Britax Baby Safe Plus rear-facing child

seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.

Type approval: E1 03301146

2 With regard to other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 30

henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

Child safety 01

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 31

Weight/Age Front seat Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 1

9-18 kg

(9-36 months)

Volvo Child seat rear-facing child

seat, secured with the car's seat-

belt and straps.

Type approval: E5 03135

Volvo Child seat rear-facing child seat,

secured with the car's seatbelt, straps

and support legs.

Type approval: E5 03135

Volvo Child seat rear-facing child seat,

secured with the car's seatbelt, straps

and support legs.

Type approval: E5 03135

Britax Fixway rear-facing child

seat, secured with the ISOFIX fix-

ture system and straps.

Type approval: E5 03171

Britax Fixway rear-facing child seat,

secured with the ISOFIX fixture system

and straps.

Type approval: E5 03171

Group 2/3

15-36 kg

(3-12 yr)

Volvo Booster cushion with or

without backrest.

Type approval: E5 03139

Volvo Booster cushion with or without

backrest.

Type approval: E5 03139

Volvo Booster cushion with or without

backrest.

Type approval: E5 03139

Volvo Integrated booster cushion -

available as a factory fitted option.

Type approval: E5 03140

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 31

henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

Child safety01

32

Integrated booster cushion*

G 02

10 69

Volvo's integrated booster cushion for the cen-

tre rear seat is specially designed to provide

optimum safety for children. Combined with

the regular seatbelt, the booster cushion is

approved for children weighing between 15

and 36 kg.

Check before driving that:

the seatbelt is in contact with the child's body and is not slack or twisted

the seatbelt does not lie across the child's throat or below the shoulder (see preced- ing illustration)

the lap section of the seatbelt is positioned low over the pelvis to provide optimal pro- tection

the head restraint is adjusted to suit the child's head.

Lowering the booster cushion

G 02

10 70

Fold down the booster cushion.

G 02

10 71

Release the Velcro fastener.

G 02

10 72

Lift back the upper section.

WARNING

Repair or replacement should only be per- formed by an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not make any modifications or additions to the booster cushion.

If an integrated booster cushion has been subjected to a major load, such as in con- junction with a collision, the entire booster cushion must be replaced. Even if the booster cushion appears to be undamaged, it may not afford the same level of protec- tion. The booster cushion must also be replaced if it is heavily worn.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 32

henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

Child safety 01

33

Raising the booster cushion

G 02

10 74

Fold down the upper section. G

02 10

75

Secure the Velcro fastener.

G 02

10 76

Fold the booster cushion into the seat cush-

ion.

NOTE

Make sure that both sections of the booster cushion are secured with the Velcro strap before folding up. Otherwise the upper sec- tion can become trapped in the rear seat backrest when the booster cushion is folded down again.

Child safety locks, rear doors

The controls for operating the rear door power

windows and the rear door opening handles

can be blocked from opening from the inside.

For more information, see page 54.

ISOFIX fixture system for child seats

G 02

10 64

Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system

are concealed behind the lower section of the

rear seat backrest, in the outer seats.

The location of the mounting points is indicated

by symbols in the backrest upholstery (see pre-

ceding illustration).

Press the seat cushion down to access the

mounting points.

NOTE

The ISOFIX fixture system is an accessory for the passenger seat.

Always follow the manufacturer's installation

instructions when connecting a child seat to

the ISOFIX mounting points.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 33

henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

Child safety01

34

Size classes Child seats are in different sizes cars are in

different sizes. This means that not all child

seats are suitable for all seats in all car models.

Consequently, a size classification has been

introduced for child seats using the ISOFIX fix-

ture system in order to assist users in choosing

the correct child seat (see the following table).

Size class

Description

A Full size, front-facing child

seat

B Reduced size (alt.1), front-

facing child seat

B1 Reduced size (alt.2), front-

facing child seat

Size class

Description

C Full size, rear-facing child

seat

D Reduced size, rear-facing

child seat

E Rear-facing infant seat

F Transverse infant seat, left-

hand

G Transverse infant seat, right-

hand

WARNING

Never place a child in the passenger seat if the car is equipped with an activated airbag.

NOTE

If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classifi- cation then the car model must be included on the child seat's vehicle list.

NOTE

Contact a Volvo dealer for Volvo recom- mendations on ISOFIX child seats.

Types of ISOFIX child seat

Type of child seat Weight (Age) Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats

Front seat Outer rear seat

Infant seat transverse max. 10 kg (0 9 months) F - -

G - -

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 34

henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

Child safety 01

35

Type of child seat Weight (Age) Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats

Front seat Outer rear seat

Infant seat, rear-facing max. 10 kg (0 9 months) E OK OK

Infant seat, rear-facing max. 13 kg (0 12 months) E OK OK

D OK OK

C - OK

Child seat, rear-facing 9 18 kg (9 36 months) D OK OK

C - OK

Child seat, rear-facing 9 18 kg (9 36 months) B OKA OKA

B1 OKA OKA

A OKA OKA

A Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 35

henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

Child safety01

36

Upper mounting points for child seats

G 02

10 68

The car is equipped with upper mounting

points for child seats. These mounting points

are located on the parcel shelf and are con-

cealed by plastic covers. Bend aside the plas-

tic covers to access each respective mounting

point.

For cars with folding head restraints on the

outside seats the head restraints should be

folded to facilitate installation.

The upper mounting points are primarily

intended for use with front-facing child seats.

Volvo recommends that small children should

sit in rear-facing child seats for as long as pos-

sible.

For detailed information on how the child seat

should be tensioned in the upper mounting

points, see the seat manufacturer's instruc-

tions.

WARNING

The child seat's straps must always be routed under the rear head restraints before being tensioned at the mounting point.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 36

henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

01

37

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 37

henrikrosenqvist

38 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Remote control key/key blade................................................................ 40

Privacy locking*....................................................................................... 45

Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*...................................... 46

Keyless drive*.......................................................................................... 48

Locking/unlocking................................................................................... 50

Child safety locks.................................................................................... 54

Alarm*...................................................................................................... 55

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 38

henrikrosenqvist

02 LOCKS AND ALARM

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 39

henrikrosenqvist

02 Locks and alarm

Remote control key/key blade

02

40

General

The car is supplied with two remote control

keys or two PCCs (Personal Car

Communicator). They are used to start the car

and for locking and unlocking.

More remote control keys can be ordered up

to six can be programmed and used for the

same car.

The PCC has increased functionality com-

pared with the remote control key. Only the

remote control key is referred to in the remain-

der of this chapter when describing functions

available in both the PCC and remote control

key.

WARNING

If there are children in the car:

Always remember to switch off the power supply to power windows and sunroof by removing the remote control key if the driver leaves the car.

Detachable key blade A remote control key contains a detachable

metal key blade for mechanical locking/

unlocking of the driver's door, glovebox and

boot lid (privacy locking).

For key blade functions, see page 43.

For privacy locking, see page 45.

The key blades' unique code is available at

authorised Volvo workshops, who can order

new key blades.

Loss of a remote control key If you lose a remote control key then new ones

can be ordered at an authorised Volvo work-

shop. The remaining remote control keys must

then be taken to the workshop. The code of the

missing remote control key must be erased

from the system as a theft prevention measure.

The current number of keys registered to the

car can be checked under Car settings Car

Key memory Number of keys. For a

description of the menu system, see

page 116.

Key memory door mirrors and driver's

seat The settings are automatically connected to

each respective remote control key, see pages

71 and 91.

The function can be activated/deactivated

under Car settings Car Key memory

Seat & mirror positions. For a description of

the menu system, see page 116.

For cars with Keyless drive function, see

page 48.

Indicator for locking/unlocking When the car is locked or unlocked using the

remote control key, the direction indicators

confirm that locking/unlocking was correctly

performed:

Locking - one flash

Unlocking - two flashes.

After locking the indication is only given if all

locks are activated once the doors have been

closed.

The function can be activated/deactivated

under Car settings Light settings Lock

confirmation light and Car settings Light

settings Unlock confirmation light.

For a description of the menu system, see

page 116.

Immobiliser Each remote control key has a unique code.

The car can only be started with the correct

remote control key with the correct code.

The following error messages in the combined

instrument panel's information display are rela-

ted to the electronic immobiliser:

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 40

henrikrosenqvist

02 Locks and alarm

Remote control key/key blade

02

41

Message Specification

Key error Try again Error reading remote

control key during

start. Try to start the

car again.

Car key not found Applies only to the

PCC's Keyless drive

function. Errors

reading the PCC

during starting. Try

to start the car

again.

Immobiliser Try

start again

Remote control key

function error during

start. If the fault per-

sists; contact an

authorised Volvo

workshop.

For starting the car, see page 95.

Low battery in remote control key The batteries should be replaced if:

the information symbol illuminates and Car key Battery low is shown in the display

and/or

the locks repeatedly do not react to signals from the remote control key within 20 metres from the car.

For changing the battery, see page 46.

Functions

G 02

10 78

Remote control key.

Locking

Unlocking

Approach light duration

Boot lid

Panic function

G 02

10 79

PCC* (Personal Car Communicator).

Information

Function buttons

Locking Locks the doors and boot lid

and then activates the alarm.

Unlocking Unlocks the doors and boot

lid and deactivates the alarm.

The function can be changed from unlocking

all doors simultaneously, to opening the driv-

er's door after one press of the button and,

after a further press of the button - within 10

seconds - opening the remaining doors.

The function is changed under Car settings

Lock settings Doors unlock. For a

description of the menu system, see

page 116.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 41

henrikrosenqvist

02 Locks and alarm

Remote control key/key blade

02

42 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

car's lighting at a distance. For more informa-

tion, see page 83.

Boot lid Unlocks and disarms the boot

lid only. For more information, see page 51.

Panic function Used to attract attention

in an emergency.

Press and hold the red button for at least 3

seconds or press it twice within 3 seconds to

activate the direction indicators and the horn.

The function can be turned off with the same

button once it has been active for at least

5 seconds. Otherwise the function switches off

automatically after 2 minutes and 45 seconds.

Global opening One long press - at least 4 seconds - on button

or opens or closes all windows. Also

closes the sunroof if open.

The function can be used to quickly air the car

in hot weather for example.

WARNING

If the sunroof and windows are closed using the remote control key, check that no one is in danger of getting hands caught.

Range The remote control key has a range of up to

20 m from the car.

NOTE

The remote control key functions can be disrupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings, topographical conditions etc. The car can always be locked/unlocked using the key blade, see page 44.

Unique functions PCC*

G 02

10 80

Information button

Indicator lamps

Using the information button enables access to

certain information from the car via the indica-

tor lamps.

Using the information button

Press the information button .

All indicator lamps flash for approximately

7 seconds and the light travels around on

the PCC. This indicates that the informa-

tion from the car has been read.

If any of the other buttons are pressed dur-

ing this time then the reading is interrupted.

NOTE

If none of the indicator lamps illuminates with repeated use of the information button and in different locations (as well as after 7 seconds and after the light has travelled around on the PCC), contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

Indicator lamps display information in accord-

ance with the following illustration:

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 42

henrikrosenqvist

Approach lighting Used to switch on the

02 Locks and alarm

Remote control key/key blade

02

43

G 03

02 62

Green continuous light the car is locked.

Yellow continuous light the car is

unlocked.

Red light flashing alternately in the two

indicator lamps indicates, using the HBS

(Heart Beat Sensor) that someone may be

in the car. This indication is only displayed

if the alarm was triggered.

Red continuous light the alarm has been

triggered.

Range The PCC lock functions have a range of up to

20 m from the car.

The approach lighting, panic function and the

functions controlled by the information button

have a range of up to a maximum of 100 m from

the car.

NOTE

The information button functions can be disrupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings, topographical conditions etc.

Out of PCC range If the PCC is too far away from the car for the

information to be read then the status the car

was last left in is shown, without the light trav-

elling around on the PCC.

If several PCCs are used for the car then it is

only the PCC last used for locking/unlocking

that shows correct status.

NOTE

If no indicator lamps illuminate when the information button is used then this can be because the last communication between the PCC and the car was disrupted by sur- rounding radio waves, buildings, topo- graphical conditions etc.

Heart Beat Sensor

The function operates using an HBS (Heart

Beat Sensor). HBS is a supplement to the car's

alarm system and can indicate at a distance

whether anybody is in the car. This indication

is only displayed if the alarm was triggered.

The HBS detects an individual's heartbeat that

is transmitted to the car's bodywork. For this

reason the function of the HBS can be distur-

bed in an environment subject to noise and

vibration.

Detachable key blade

Using the remote control key's detachable key

blade:

the driver's door can be opened manually if central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key

access to the glovebox and cargo area

(privacy locking 1) is blocked, see page 45.

the boot lid can be opened manually if cen- tral locking is not activated with the remote control key, see page 52.

1 Applies to certain markets

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 43

henrikrosenqvist

02 Locks and alarm

Remote control key/key blade

02

44

Removing the key blade

G 02

10 82

Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.

At the same time pull the key blade straight

out backwards.

Inserting the key blade Carefully refit the key blade in place in the

remote control key, to avoid damaging it.

1. Hold the remote control key with the slot

pointed up and lower the key blade into its

slot.

2. Lightly press the key blade. You should

hear a "click" when the key blade is locked

in.

Unlocking doors with the key blade

If central locking cannot be activated with the

remote control key, e.g. if the batteries are dis-

charged, then the driver's door can be opened

as follows:

NOTE

When the driver's door is unlocked using the key blade and is opened, the alarm is trig- gered.

1. Unlock the driver's door using the key

blade in the door handle's keyhole.

2. Deactivate the alarm by inserting the

remote control key in the ignition switch.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 44

henrikrosenqvist

02 Locks and alarm

Privacy locking*

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 45

Privacy locking

G 02

10 83

Active locks for remote control key, with key blade and privacy locking not activated.

G 02

10 84

Active locks for remote control key, without key blade and privacy locking activated.

The privacy locking function is intended for

when the car is left for service, with a hotel

parking valet or similar. The glovebox is then

locked and the boot lid lock is disconnected

from the central locking. The boot lid cannot be

opened with either the central locking button in

the front doors or the remote control key.

This means that the remote control key without

key blade can only be used to activate/deacti-

vate the alarm, to open the doors and to drive

the car.

The remote control key is handed over without

the detachable key blade which the owner then

keeps.

Activating/deactivating

G 02

05 08

Activating privacy locking.

To activate privacy locking:

Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock.

Turn the key blade 180 degrees clockwise.

Pull out the key blade. The information dis-

play shows a message at the same time.

NOTE

Do not reinsert the key blade into the remote control key but keep it in a safe place instead.

Deactivation takes place in reverse order.

For information on locking the glovebox only,

see page 51.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 45

henrikrosenqvist

02 Locks and alarm

Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*

02

46 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Replacing the battery

G 02

10 85

G 02

10 86

G 01

55 18

Opening

Slide the spring-loaded catch to the

side.

At the same time pull the key blade

straight out backwards.

Insert a 3 mm slot screwdriver in the

hole behind the spring-loaded catch and

gently prize the remote control key up.

NOTE

Turn the remote control key over with the buttons facing up, this is to avoid the bat- teries falling out when it is opened.

IMPORTANT

Avoid touching the battery and its terminals with your fingers, as this could damage their functionality.

Battery replacement Closely study how the battery/batteries are

secured on the inside of the cover, with

regard to their (+) and () sides.

Remote control key 1. Carefully prize out the battery.

2. Install a new one with the (+) side down.

PCC* 1. Carefully prize out the batteries.

2. First install one new one with the (+) side up.

3. Position the white plastic tab in between and finally install a second new battery with the (+) side down.

Battery type Use batteries with the designation CR2430, 3V

- one in the remote control key and two in the

PCC.

Assembly 1. Press the remote control key together.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 46

henrikrosenqvist

02 Locks and alarm

Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 47

2. Hold the remote control key with the slot

pointed up and lower the key blade into its

slot.

3. Lightly press the key blade. You should

hear a "click" when the key blade is locked

in.

IMPORTANT

Make sure that you dispose of old batteries in an environmentally-friendly way.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 47

henrikrosenqvist

02 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

02

48 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Keyless drive (only PCC)

Keyless lock and ignition system

G 02

05 77

The keyless drive function in the PCC allows

the car to be unlocked, driven and locked with-

out the need for a key. You simply have to have

the PCC with you. The system makes it easier

and more convenient to open the car, e.g.

when your hands are full.

The car's two PCCs incorporate the Keyless

function. Additional PCCs can be ordered.

PCC range In order to open a door or the boot lid, a PCC

must be no more than approx. 1.5 metres from

the car door handle or boot lid. This means that

the person who wishes to lock or unlock a door

must have the PCC with him or her. It is not

possible to lock or unlock a door if the PCC is

on the opposite side of the car.

The red rings in the preceding illustration indi-

cate the range covered by the system's anten-

nas.

If all PCCs are removed from the car when the

engine is running or key position II is active

(see page 70) and if all doors are closed, then

a warning message is shown in the information

display and an audio reminder signal sounds at

the same time.

The warning message clears and the audio

reminder signal stops when the PCC is brought

back to the car after:

a door has been opened and closed

the PCC is inserted into the ignition switch

the READ button has been pressed.

Handling the PCC safely If a PCC with keyless drive function is left in the

car, it is deactivated temporarily when the car

is locked. This prevents unauthorised entry.

However, if someone breaks into the car,

opens the door and finds the PCC, it can be

reactivated. It is therefore important to handle

all PCCs with great care.

IMPORTANT

Never leave a PCC behind in the car.

Interference to PCC function Electromagnetic fields and screening can inter-

fere with the keyless drive system. For this

reason, do not place the PCC near mobile

phones or metallic objects.

If interference is experienced nonetheless, use

the PCC and key blade in the normal way, see

page 41.

Unlocking Open the doors with the door handles or open

the boot lid with the boot lid's handle.

Unlocking with the key blade If the keyless drive function in the PCC is not

operating, then the driver's door can be

unlocked with the key blade. In this case cen-

tral locking is not activated.

NOTE

Unlocking with the key blade triggers the alarm. For deactivation, see page 55.

Key memory driver's seat and door

mirrors

PCC memory function If several people each with a PCC approach the

car, then the settings for seat and mirrors are

implemented for the person who opens the

driver's door.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 48

henrikrosenqvist

02 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 49

After the driver's door has been opened by

person A with PCC A, but person B with PCC

B shall drive, the settings can be changed in

three ways:

Standing by the driver's door, or sitting behind the steering wheel, person B presses their PCC's unlock button, see page 41.

Select one of three possible memories for seat adjustment with seat button 1-3, see page 72.

Adjust seat and mirrors manually, see page 71 and 91.

Locking Lock the doors and the boot lid by pressing the

lock button on one of the door handles on the

outside.

All doors and the boot lid must be closed

before the car can be locked. Otherwise the car

will not be locked.

NOTE

On cars with automatic transmission, the gear selector must be set in the P position otherwise the car cannot be locked or the alarm armed.

Lock settings The keyless function can be adapted to specify

which of the car doors are to be unlocked,

under Car settings Lock settings

Keyless entry. For a description of the menu

system, see page 116.

Antenna location

G 02

04 79

The keyless system has a number of integrated

antennae located around the car:

Rear bumper, centre, inside

Door handle, left rear

Parcel shelf, centre, underside

Roof, above centre rear seat

Door handle, right rear

Centre console, under the rear section

Centre console, under the front section.

WARNING

People with pacemaker operations should not come closer than 22 cm to the keyless system's antennae with their pacemaker. This is to prevent interference between the pacemaker and the keyless system.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 49

henrikrosenqvist

02 Locks and alarm

Locking/unlocking

02

50 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

From the outside

The remote control key locks/unlocks all doors

and the boot lid simultaneously. The lock but-

tons and door handles are disengaged during

locking which also prevents opening from the

inside, so-called deadlocks function*, see

page 52.

The fuel filler flap can be opened when the car

is unlocked, see page 200. It cannot be

opened if the car is locked and the alarm is

armed.

NOTE

The car can be locked even if a door is open1. It is also locked when the door is closed, and there is a risk that the remote control key will be locked in.

WARNING

Be aware that there is a risk that you can be locked in the car if it is locked from the out- side.

Automatic relocking If none of the doors or the boot lid is opened

within two minutes of unlocking, all are locked

again automatically. This function prevents the

car from being left unlocked unintentionally.

For cars with alarms, see page 55.

From the inside

G 01

92 16

All of the doors and the boot lid can be locked

or unlocked simultaneously using the door but-

tons on the door panel.

Unlocking A door can be unlocked from the inside in two

different ways:

Press the door unlock button.

Press and hold to also open all windows.

Pull the door handle once and release. Pull the door handle again to open the door.

Locking Press the door lock button after the front doors

are closed. Press and hold to also close all of

the windows and the sunroof.

All the doors can be locked manually with their

respective lock buttons after they have been

closed.

Automatic locking The doors and boot lid can be locked auto-

matically when the car starts to move.

The function can be activated/deactivated

under Car settings Lock settings

Doors automatic lock. For a description of the

menu system, see page 116.

1 Only applies to cars in certain markets, but not to cars with Keyless drive.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 50

henrikrosenqvist

02 Locks and alarm

Locking/unlocking

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 51

Glovebox

G 02

05 48

The glovebox can only be locked/unlocked

using the remote control key's detachable key

blade. (For information on the key blade, see

page 44).

Locking the glovebox:

Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock.

Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.

The keyhole is horizontal in the locked

position.

Pull out the key blade.

Unlock by carrying this out in reverse order.

For information on privacy locking, see

page 45.

Boot lid

G 02

10 93

Unlocking with the remote control key The alarm for the tailgate can be disarmed* and

the tailgate unlocked on its own by using the

remote control key.

NOTE

The function does not open the boot lid it is only unlocked.

If the car is equipped with an alarm* the alarm

indicator on the instrument panel stops to

show that alarm for the whole of the car is not

armed. The alarm's level and movement sen-

sors and the sensors for opening the boot lid

are automatically disconnected.

The doors remain locked and armed.

The boot lid can be opened in two

different ways One press the boot lid is unlocked but

remains closed. Press the rubber coated pres-

sure plate under the boot lid handle to open.

If the boot lid is not opened within two minutes

then it is relocked and the alarm is re-armed.

Two presses the boot lid is unlocked and

opened several centimetres. Rain, cold, frost

or snow could prevent the boot lid from lifting

on its own.

NOTE

When the tailgate is closed it remains unlocked until the car is relocked with the remote control key.

Locking with the remote control key Press the remote control key button for lock-

ing, see page 41.

If the car is equipped with an alarm* the alarm

indicator on the instrument panel starts to flash

to show that alarm is armed.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 51

henrikrosenqvist

02 Locks and alarm

Locking/unlocking

02

52 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Unlocking the car from inside

G 02

10 99

Press the lighting panel button to unlock the

boot lid.

Unlocking with the key blade

G 02

11 00

G 02

11 01

If the remote control key button for opening the

boot lid is not working then the boot lid can be

unlocked with the key blade.

Prize off the plug covering the keyhole.

Unlock the boot lid by turning the key blade

one half turn anticlockwise as illustrated.

Deadlocks*

When deadlocked, the doors cannot be

opened from the inside if they are locked.

The deadlocks are activated with the remote

control key and are set after a 10 second delay

after the doors are locked.

The car can only be unlocked from a deadlock

state with the remote control key. The driver's

door can also be unlocked with the detachable

key blade.

Temporary deactivation

G 02

13 60

Active menu options are indicated with a cross.

Navigation

ENTER

MENU

EXIT

If someone is going to stay in the car but the

doors must be locked from the outside, then

the deadlocks function can be temporarily

switched off. This is carried out as follows:

1. Access the menu system under Car

settings (for a detailed description of the

menu system, see page 116).

2. Select Reduced guard.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 52

henrikrosenqvist

02 Locks and alarm

Locking/unlocking

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 53

3. Select Activate once: The instrument

panel display shows the message

Reduced guard - See manual and the

deadlocks function is switched off when

the car is locked.

or

Select Ask on exit: Each time the engine

is switched off the audio system's display

shows the message ENTER reduces

protection until the engine is started

again. Press EXIT to cancel - then select

one of the alternatives:

If the deadlocks function shall be switched off: Press ENTER and lock the car.

If the car is equipped with an alarm with move-

ment and tilt detectors*, then these are

switched off at the same time, see page 55.

The next time the engine is started, the system

is reset to zero and the instrument panel dis-

play shows the message Full guard at which

the deadlocks function and the alarm's move-

ment and tilt detectors* are re-engaged.

or

If the locking system shall not be changed: Select no options at all and lock the car. Or press EXIT and lock the car.

NOTE

If the car is equipped with an alarm:

Remember that the car's alarm is armed when the car is locked.

If any of the doors are opened from the inside then the alarm will be triggered.

WARNING

Do not allow anyone to remain in the car without first deactivating the deadlocks to avoid the risk of anyone being locked in.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 53

henrikrosenqvist

02 Locks and alarm

Child safety locks

02

54 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Manual blocking of the rear doors

G 02

10 77

The child safety locks are located on the trailing

edge of the rear doors and are only accessible

when the doors are open.

Use the key blade to turn the lock and thus

activate or deactivate the child safety lock.

The door cannot be opened from inside.

The doors can be opened from inside.

NOTE

Cars with electric child safety locks do not have manual child locks.

Electrical locking of the rear doors and power windows*

G 01

93 00

When the electric child safety lock is active:

the rear windows can only be opened with the driver's door control panel

the rear doors cannot be opened from the inside.

1. Child safety locks are activated/deacti-

vated in key position I or II see page 70.

2. Press the button in the driver's door control

panel.

> The information display shows a mes-

sage.

The lamp on the switch illuminates when

the locks are activated.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 54

henrikrosenqvist

02 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 55

General

The alarm is triggered if:

a non-approved key is used or if an attempt

a movement is detected in the passenger compartment (if fitted with a movement

the car is raised or towed away (if fitted

a battery cable is disconnected.

anyone tries to disconnect the siren.

If there is a fault in the alarm system, the infor-

mation display shows a message. Contact an

authorised Volvo workshop.

NOTE

The movement detectors trigger the alarm in the event of movements in the passenger compartment. For this reason the alarm could be triggered if the car is left with a window open or if an electric passenger compartment heater is used. To avoid this: Close the windows when leaving the car and aim the air from the passenger compart- ment heater so that it is not directed up into the passenger compartment.

NOTE

Do not attempt to repair or modify alarm system components. All such attempts could affect the terms of insurance.

Alarm indicator

G 02

11 03

A red LED on the instrument panel indicates

the alarm system's status:

LED not lit Alarm not armed

The LED flashes once every other second Alarm is armed

The LED flashes rapidly after disarming the alarm (and until the remote control key is inserted in the ignition switch and key posi- tion I is selected) Alarm has been trig- gered.

Arming the alarm

Press the remote control key lock button.

Disarming the alarm

Press the remote control key unlock but- ton.

Deactivating a triggered alarm Press the remote control key unlock button or

insert the remote control key in the ignition

switch.

Other alarm functions

Automatic re-arming of the alarm This function prevents the car being left with

alarm disarmed unintentionally.

If the car is unlocked with the remote control

key (and the alarm is disarmed) but none of the

doors or the boot lid is opened within 2

minutes, then the alarm is automatically re-

armed. The car is relocked at the same time.

Alarm signals When the alarm is triggered, the following hap-

pens:

A siren sounds for less than 30 seconds. The siren has its own battery which is inde- pendent of the car battery.

The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes or until the alarm has been deactivated.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 55

henrikrosenqvist

with a tilt detector*).

detector).

is made to force the ignition switch.

a door, the bonnet or the boot lid is opened.

02 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

02

56 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Remote control key not working If the remote control key is not working, the

alarm can still be switched off and the car

started as follows:

1. Open the driver's door with the key blade.

The alarm is triggered and the siren

sounds.

2. Insert the remote control key in the ignition

switch. The alarm is deactivated. The alarm

indicator flashes quickly until the remote

control key is inserted.

Reduced alarm level

G 02

13 60

Active menu options are indicated with a cross.

Navigation

ENTER

MENU

EXIT

To avoid inadvertently triggering of the alarm -

for example when leaving a dog in the car or

during a ferry crossing - the movement and tilt

detectors can be temporarily switched off. This

is carried out as follows:

1. Access the menu system under Car

settings (for a detailed description of the

menu system, see page 116).

2. Select Reduced guard.

3. Select Activate once: The instrument

panel display shows the message

Reduced guard See manual and the

movement and tilt detectors are switched

off when the car is locked.

or

Select Ask on exit: Each time the engine

is switched off the audio system's display

shows the message ENTER reduces

protection until the engine is started

once again. EXIT cancels - then select

one of the alternatives:

If the movement and tilt detectors shall be switched off: Press ENTER and lock the car.

If the car is equipped with the deadlocks func-

tion* then it is switched off at the same time,

see page 52.

The next time the engine is started, the system

is reset to zero and the instrument panel dis-

play shows the message Full guard at which

the movement and tilt detectors and the dead-

locks function are re-engaged.

or

If the detectors shall not be switched off: Select no options at all and lock the car. Or press EXIT and lock the car.

Testing the alarm system

Testing the movement detector in the

passenger compartment 1. Close all windows. Remain in the car.

2. Arming the alarm, see page 55.

3. Wait 15 seconds.

4. Trigger the alarm by moving your arms for-

ward and back at backrest height. A siren

sounds and all direction indicators flash.

5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car

with the remote control key.

Testing the alarm sensors in the doors 1. Arming the alarm, see page 55.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 56

henrikrosenqvist

02 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 57

2. Wait 15 seconds.

3. Unlock the driver's door using the key

blade.

4. Open the driver's door. A siren sounds and

all direction indicators flash.

5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car

with the remote control key.

Testing the alarm sensors in the bonnet 1. Sit in the car and deactivate the alarm, see

page 55.

2. Arm the alarm, see page 55. Remain in the

car and lock the doors with the button on

the remote control key.

3. Wait 15 seconds.

4. Open the bonnet with the handle under the

dashboard. A siren sounds and all direc-

tion indicators flash.

5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car

with the remote control key.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 57

henrikrosenqvist

G 02

09 12

58 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Instruments and controls........................................................................ 60

Instruments and controls - Executive .................................................... 69

Key positions........................................................................................... 70

Seats....................................................................................................... 71

Seats - Executive.................................................................................... 75

Steering wheel........................................................................................ 77

Lighting................................................................................................... 78

Wipers and washing................................................................................ 87

Windows, rearview and door mirrors...................................................... 89

Power sunroof*........................................................................................ 93

Starting the engine.................................................................................. 95

Starting the engine Flexifuel................................................................. 97

Starting the engine external battery..................................................... 99

Gearboxes............................................................................................. 100

All-wheel drive AWD*......................................................................... 104

Foot brake............................................................................................. 105

Parking brake........................................................................................ 107

HomeLink EU*..................................................................................... 110

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 58

henrikrosenqvist

03 YOUR DRIVING ENVIRONMENT

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 59

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

03

60

Instrument overview

G 02

11 07

Left-hand drive.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 60

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 61

Function Page

Menus and messages,

direction indicators,

main/dipped beam, trip

computer

78,

81, 118,

149

Cruise control 154, 155

Horn, airbags 18, 77

Combined instrument

panel

63, 67

Menu, audio and phone

control

116,

133, 186

Ignition switch 70

Start/stop button 95

Hazard warning flashers 80

Door handle -

Control panel 50, 54,

89, 91

Menu control, climate

control and audio system

116,

124, 135

Climate control, ECC* 124

Gear selector 100

Function Page

Controls for active chas-

sis (Four-C)*

153

Wipers and washing 87, 88

Steering wheel adjust-

ment

77

Parking brake* 107

Bonnet opener 218

Seat adjustment* 71

Headlamp control,

opener for fuel filler flap

and boot lid

51, 78,

200

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 61

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

03

62

876

13141516

54321

11

10

11

12

10

9

17

18

20

19

G 02

11 08

Right-hand drive.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 62

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 63

Function Page

Hazard warning flashers 80

Ignition switch 70

Start/stop button 95

Cruise control 154, 155

Combined instrument

panel

63, 67

Horn, airbags 18, 77

Menu, audio and phone

control

116,

133, 186

Wipers and washing 87, 88

Headlamp control,

opener for fuel filler flap

and boot lid

51, 78,

200

Door handle -

Control panel 50, 54,

89, 91

Seat adjustment* 71

Bonnet opener 218

Parking brake 107

Function Page

Steering wheel adjust-

ment

77

Menus and messages,

direction indicators,

main/dipped beam, trip

computer

78,

81, 118,

149

Controls for active chas-

sis (Four-C)*

153

Gear selector 100

Climate control, ECC* 124

Menu control, climate

control and audio system

116,

124, 135

Information displays

G 02

11 12

Information displays.

The information displays show information on

some of the car's functions, e.g. cruise control,

trip computer and messages. The information

is shown with text and symbols.

There are further descriptions under the func-

tions that use the information displays.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 63

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

03

64

Meters

G 02

11 13

Meters in the combined instrument panel.

Speedometer

Fuel gauge. See also Trip computer, page

149, and Refuelling, page 200.

Tachometer. The meter indicates engine

speed in thousands of revolutions per

minute (rpm).

Indicator, information and warning symbols

G 01

82 82

Indicator and warning symbols.

Indicator and information symbols

Indicator and warning symbols 1

Main beam and direction indicator symbol

Functionality check All indicator and warning symbols illuminate in

key position II or when the engine is started.

When the engine has started, all the symbols

should go out except the parking brake sym-

bol, which only goes out when the brake is

disengaged.

If the engine does not start or if the functionality

check is carried out in key position II then all

symbols go out after 5 seconds except the

symbol for faults in the car's emissions system

and the symbol for low oil pressure.

Indicator and information symbols

Symbol Specification

Direction indicators on trailer

Emissions system

ABS fault

Rear fog lamp on

Stability system

Engine preheater (diesel)

Low level in fuel tank

Information, read display text

Main beam On

1 For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are made via display text. For information on checking the oil level, see page 219.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 64

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

03

65

Symbol Specification

Left-hand direction indicators

Right-hand direction indicators

Direction indicators on trailer This symbol flashes when the direction indica-

tors are used and the trailer is connected. If the

symbol flashes more quickly then one of the

lamps on the car or the trailer is broken.

Emissions system If the symbol illuminates then it may be due to

a fault in the car's emissions system. Drive to

an authorised Volvo workshop to have the sys-

tem checked.

ABS fault If this symbol illuminates then the system is not

working. The car's regular brake system con-

tinues to work, but without the ABS function.

1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the

engine.

2. Restart the engine.

3. If the symbol remains illuminated, drive to

an authorised Volvo workshop to have the

ABS system checked.

Rear fog lamp This symbol illuminates when the rear fog lamp

is on.

Stability system A flashing symbol indicates that the stability

system is operating. If the symbol illuminates

with constant glow then there is a fault in the

system.

Engine preheater (diesel) This symbol illuminates during engine preheat-

ing. Preheating occurs when the temperature

is below 2 C. The car can be started once the

symbol goes out.

Low level in fuel tank When the symbol illuminates the level in the

fuel tank is low, refuel as soon as possible.

Information, read display text When one of the car's systems does not

behave as intended, this information symbol

illuminates and a text appears on the informa-

tion display. The message text is cleared with

the READ button, see page 118, or it disap-

pears automatically after a time (time depend-

ing on which function is indicated). The infor-

mation symbol can also illuminate in

conjunction with other symbols.

NOTE

When a service message is shown, the sym- bol and message are cleared using the READ button, or clear automatically after a while.

Main beam On The symbol illuminates when main beam is on

and with main beam flash

Left/right-hand direction indicators Both direction indicator symbols flash when

the hazard warning flashers are used.

Indicator and warning symbols

Symbol Specification

Low oil pressure A

Parking brake applied

Airbags SRS

Seatbelt reminder

Alternator not charging

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 65

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

03

66

Symbol Specification

Fault in brake system

Warning

A For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are made via display text, see pages 218 and 220.

Low oil pressure If this symbol illuminates during driving then

the engine's oil pressure is too low. Stop the

engine immediately and check the engine oil

level, top up if necessary. If the symbol illumi-

nates and the oil level is normal, contact an

authorised Volvo workshop.

Parking brake applied This symbol illuminates with a constant glow

when the parking brake is applied. With the

electric parking brake, this symbol flashes

while it is being applied and then illuminates

with a constant glow.

A flashing symbol means that a fault has arisen.

Read the message on the information display.

NOTE

This symbol also illuminates when the mechanical parking brake is only lightly applied.

Airbags SRS If this symbol remains illuminated or illuminates

while driving, it means a fault has been

detected in the seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS, or

IC systems. Drive immediately to an authorised

Volvo workshop to have the system checked.

Seatbelt reminder This symbol illuminates if someone in a front

seat has not put on their seatbelt or if someone

in a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt.

Alternator not charging This symbol illuminates during driving if a fault

has occurred in the electrical system. Contact

an authorised Volvo workshop.

Fault in brake system If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level

may be too low. Stop the car in a safe place

and check the level in the brake fluid reservoir,

see page 221.

If the brake and ABS symbols illuminate at the

same time, there may be a fault in the brake

force distribution system.

1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the

engine.

2. Restart the engine.

If both symbols extinguish, continue driving.

If the symbols remain illuminated, check the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see

page 221. If the brake fluid level is nor- mal but the symbols are still illuminated, the car can be driven, with great care, to an authorised Volvo workshop to have the brake system checked.

WARNING

If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.

The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated by an authorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING

If the brake and ABS symbols are illumi- nated at the same time, there is a risk that the rear end will skid during heavy braking.

Warning The red warning symbol illuminates when a

fault has been indicated which could affect the

safety and/or driveability of the car. An explan-

atory text is shown on the information display

at the same time. The symbol remains visible

until the fault has been rectified but the text

message can be cleared with the READ but-

ton, see page 119. The warning symbol can

also illuminate in conjunction with other sym-

bols.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 66

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

03

67

Action:

1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the car

further.

2. Read the information on the information

display. Implement the action in accord-

ance with the message in the display. Clear

the message using the READ button.

Reminder doors not closed

If one of the doors, the bonnet 2 or boot lid is

not closed properly then the information or

warning symbol illuminates together with an

explanatory text message in the combined

instrument panel. Stop the car in a safe place

as soon as possible and close the door, bonnet

or boot lid, whichever is open.

If the car is driven at a speed lower than

approx. 7 km/h then the information

symbol illuminates.

If the car is driven at a speed higher

than about 7 km/h then the warning

symbol illuminates.

Trip meter

G 02

11 23

Trip meter and controls.

Display for trip meter

Controls for switching between trip meters

T1 and T2, as well as resetting the trip

meters.

The meters are used to measure short dis-

tances.

One short press on the control switches

between the two trip meters T1 and T2. A long

press (more than 2 seconds) resets an active

trip meter to zero. The distance is shown in the

display.

Clock

G 02

11 25

Clock and setting knob.

Controls for setting the clock.

Information display for showing the time.

Turn the knob clockwise/anticlockwise to set

the time. The set time is shown in the informa-

tion display.

The clock can be temporarily replaced by a

symbol in conjunction with a message, see

page 119.

2 Only cars with alarm*.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 67

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

03

68

Controls for trip meter and clock

G 01

61 41

Location of controls.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 68

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls - Executive

03

69

Analogue clock 1

G 02

90 76

Analogue clock.

Button for setting indicator backwards in

time.

Button for setting indicator forwards in

time.

The analogue clock is located in the instrument

panel above the glovebox.

To set the time:

Use the appropriate button to move the

indicators either forward or back in time.

Setting can be made by means of two

methods:

Hold the button depressed - the indica- tor is first moved slowly in time, equiv- alent to about 5 minutes, then faster.

Release the button when the clock shows the correct time.

Press the button again - the indicator is moved about 10 seconds in time.

1 Not available in right-hand drive cars.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 69

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Key positions

03

70 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Functions

G 02

11 26

Ignition switch with remote control key, start/stop button.

Insert and remove the remote control key The remote control key is inserted into the igni-

tion switch. With one gentle push the remote

control key is captured into the correct posi-

tion.

The remote control key is withdrawn from the

ignition switch by means of one touch. The key

is then ejected and can be removed. Automatic

transmission* must be in position P.

For information on the audio system's func-

tions with remote control key removed, see

page 133.

IMPORTANT

Foreign objects in the ignition switch can impair the function or destroy the lock.

Do not insert the remote control key back- wards! Grip the end with the detachable key blade. see page 44.

Key position 0 Insert the remote control key in the ignition

switch.

Key position I Press the remote control key into the ignition

switch and press START/STOP ENGINE.

NOTE

To reach key position II without starting the engine - do not depress the brake/clutch pedal.

Key position II Press the remote control key into the ignition

switch and press START/STOP ENGINE for

approx. 2 seconds.

Starting the engine Start the engine, see page 95.

Stopping the engine Press START/STOP ENGINE.

If the car is moving or has automatic transmis-

sion and the gear selector is not in position P:

Press twice or hold the button depressed until

the engine stops.

Return to key position 0 Press START/STOP ENGINE to return from I

or II to key position 0 0.

NOTE

During towing the remote control key should remain in the ignition switch so that the lighting can be switched on.

Posi- tion

Function

0 Odometer, clock and tempera-

ture gauge are illuminated. The

steering lock is deactivated. The

audio system can be used.

I Sunroof, power windows, phone,

ventilation fan, ECC and wind-

screen wipers can be used.

II The headlamps come on. Warn-

ing/indicator lamps illuminate for

5 seconds. All equipment oper-

ates apart from heated seats and

rear window defroster which only

work when the engine is running.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 70

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Seats

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 71

Front seats

G 02

11 27

Lumbar support adjustment, turn the

wheel 1.

Forward/backward: lift the handle to adjust

the distance to the steering wheel and ped-

als. Check that the seat is locked after

changing position.

Raise/lower* front edge of seat cushion,

pump up/down.

Adjust backrest rake, turn the wheel.

Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down.

Control panel for power seat*.

WARNING

Adjust the position of the driver's seat before setting off, never while driving. Check that the seat is locked in position.

Lowering the front seat backrest*

G 02

11 29

The passenger seat backrest can be folded

forward to make room for long loads.

Move the seat as far back/down as possi-

ble.

Adjust the backrest to an upright position

Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest

and fold it forward.

Push the seat forward so that the head restraint

"locks" in under the glovebox.

Power seat*

G 02

11 33

Front edge of seat cushion up/down

Seat forward/backward and up/down

Backrest rake

The power front seats have overload protection

which is tripped if a seat is blocked by an

object. If this happens, go to key position I or

0 and wait a short time before adjusting the

seat again.

Only one movement (forward/back/up/down)

can be made at a time.

Preparations The seats can be adjusted for a certain time

after unlocking the door with the remote con-

trol key without the key in the ignition switch.

1 Also applies to power seat.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 71

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Seats

03

72 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Seat adjustment is normally made in key posi-

tion I and can always be made when the engine

is running.

Seat with memory function*

G 02

11 34

Store setting Memory button

Memory button

Memory button

Button for storing settings

1. Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.

2. Hold the button depressed to store set-

tings while depressing one of the memory

buttons.

Using a stored setting Hold one of the memory buttons depressed

until the seat and the door mirrors stop. If you

release the button then the movement of the

seat will stop.

Key memory* in remote control key The positions of the driver's seat and the door

mirrors are stored in the key memory when the

car is locked with the remote control key.

G 01

43 87

When the car is unlocked with the same remote

control key and the driver's door is opened the

driver's seat and also the door mirrors auto-

matically adopt the positions stored in the key

memory.

NOTE

The seat and the door mirrors do not move if they are already set the relevant position.

It is also possible to use the key memory by

pressing the unlock button on the remote con-

trol key when the driver's door is open.

The key memory can be activated/deactivated

under Car Key memory Seat & mirror

positions. For a description of the menu sys-

tem, see page 116.

NOTE

The key memory in the two remote control keys and the seat memory are completely independent of each other.

Emergency stop If the seat accidentally begins to move, press

one of the buttons to stop the seat.

Restarting to reach the seat position stored in

the key memory is performed by pressing the

unlock button on the remote control key. The

driver's door must then be open.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 72

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Seats

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 73

WARNING

Risk of crushing! Make sure that children do not play with the controls. Check that there are no objects in front of, behind or under the seat during adjustment. Ensure that none of the backseat passengers will be trapped.

Heated/ventilated seats* For heated/ventilated seats, see page 124.

Rear seats

Lowering the rear seat backrest

G 02

11 35

The rear seat backrests can be tipped forwards

together, or individually, to make it easier to

transport long objects.

1. Pull the handle(s). First raise the head

restraints if they are lowered.

2. Fold the backrest forward. Adjust the cen-

tre head restraint if required.

WARNING

Check that the rear seat backrests are securely locked after raising them.

Head restraint, centre seat, rear

G 02

11 36

The head restraint can be adjusted vertically to

suit the height of the passenger. The upper

edge of the head restraint should be aligned

with middle of the back of the head. Slide it up

as required.

To lower the head restraint again the button by

the left-hand shaft must be pressed in while the

head restraint is pressed down.

Lowering the outer head restraints rear

seat*

G 02

11 37

1. The remote control key must be in position

I or II.

2. Press the button to lower the rear outer

head restraints to improve visibility.

WARNING

Do not lower the outer head restraints if there are any passengers using of the outer seats.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 73

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Seats

03

74

The head restraint is moved back manually

until a "click" can be heard.

WARNING

The head restraints must be in locked posi- tion after being raised.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 74

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Seats - Executive

03

75

Comfort seats, front

G 03

01 31

Adjusting the seat, front - rear.

Control panel for massage and lumbar.

Massage

G 03

01 32

Button for activating massage.

Hard massage

Soft massage

Each front seat has massage in the backrest.

The massage is performed by air cushions that

can massage with either a hard or soft setting.

When one of the settings is selected the mas-

sage is carried out in accordance with the

cycle: massage 6 minutes - pause 4 minutes -

massage 6 minutes etc.

When the button is in the centre position, or

when the remote control key is in position 0,

massage is not activated.

Setting lumbar

G 03

02 27

Button for setting lumbar.

The lumbar support is set with the same air

cushions used for massage. Adjustment can

be made steplessly both in terms of depth and

height using the control button, see the illus-

tration above.

Lumbar support can be set when massage is

not active.

A memory function recalls the lumbar setting

when massage is stopped or when the pres-

sure in the air cushions has decreased, e.g.

after a longer period of parking.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 75

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Seats - Executive

03

76

Adjusting the seat, front - rear

G 03

01 37

The passenger seat can be adjusted front -

rear. The seat can be moved forward or back-

ward as long as the front or rear part of the

button respectively is held depressed, see

illustration above. The angle of the backrest is

not changed.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 76

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Steering wheel

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 77

Adjusting

G 02

11 38

Adjusting the steering wheel.

Lever - releasing the steering wheel

Possible steering wheel positions

The steering wheel can be adjusted for both

height and depth:

1. Pull the lever towards you to release the

steering wheel.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position

that suits you.

3. Push back the lever to fix the steering

wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press the

steering wheel lightly at the same time as

you push the lever back.

WARNING

Adjust and secure the steering wheel before driving.

With speed related power steering* the level of

steering force can be adjusted, see

page 153.

Keypads*

G 02

11 39

Keypads in the steering wheel.

Cruise control, see page 154

Adaptive cruise control, see page 155

Audio and phone control, see page 133

Horn

G 02

11 40

Horn.

Press the centre of the steering wheel to signal.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 77

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

03

78 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Light switches

G 02

11 41

Overview, light switches.

Thumbwheel 1 for adjusting display and

instrument lighting

Rear fog lamp

Front fog lamps*

Light switches

Thumbwheel for headlamp levelling

Instrument lighting Different display and instrument lighting is

switched on depending on key position, see

page 70.

The display lighting is automatically subdued

in darkness - the sensitivity is set with the

thumbwheel.

The intensity of the instrument lighting is

adjusted with the thumbwheel.

Headlamp levelling The load in the car changes the vertical align-

ment of the headlamp beam, which could daz-

zle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting

the height of the beam. Lower the beam if the

car is heavily laden.

1. Allow the engine to run or have the remote

control key in position I.

2. Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/

lower beam alignment.

Cars with Bi-Xenon and Active Bi-Xenon

headlamps* have automatic headlamp level-

ling and are therefore not equipped with a

thumbwheel.

Main/dipped beam

G 02

11 42

Headlamp control and stalk switch.

Position for main beam flash

Position for main beam

1 For cars equipped with Executive, the thumbwheel also adjusts brightness for auxiliary lighting in handles, storage compartments in doors, analogue clock, cup holder in tunnel console and front floor lighting.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 78

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 79

Posi- tion

Specification

Automatic*/deactivated dipped

beam. Only main beam flash.

Position/parking lamps

Automatic dipped beam. Main

beam and main beam flash

work in this position.

NOTE

Main beam can only be activated in position

.

Main beam flash Move the stalk switch gently towards the steer-

ing wheel to the position for main beam flash.

Main beam comes on until the stalk switch is

released.

Dipped beam When the engine is started, dipped beam is

activated automatically* if the headlamp con-

trol is in position . If necessary, auto-

matic dipped beam for this position can be

deactivated by an authorised Volvo workshop.

In position dipped beam is always acti-

vated automatically when the engine is running

or when the remote control key is in position

II.

Main beam Main beam can only be activated when the

headlamp control is in position . Acti-

vate/deactivate main beam by moving the stalk

switch towards the steering wheel to the end

position and release.

When main beam has been activated the sym-

bol illuminates in the combined instru-

ment panel.

Active Bi-Xenon Lights*

G 02

11 43

Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left) and activated (right) respectively.

If the car is equipped with active headlamps

(Active Bi-Xenon Lights, ABL) the light from

the headlamps follows the steering wheel

movement in order to provide maximum light-

ing in bends and junctions and so provide

increased safety.

The function is activated automatically when

the car is started. The button in the cen-

tre console illuminates when the function is

activated, it flashes in the event of a malfunc-

tion. The function is only active in twilight or

darkness and only when the car is moving.

The function can be deactivated/activated with

the button.

Position/parking lamps

G 02

11 44

Headlamp control in position for position/parking lamps.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 79

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

03

80 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Turn the headlamp control to the centre posi-

tion (number plate lighting comes on at the

same time).

Rear position lamps also come on when the

boot lid is opened in order to alert anybody

behind.

Brake lights

The brake light automatically comes on during

braking.

Emergency brake light and automatic

hazard warning flashers, EBL Emergency Brake Lights (EBL) are activated in

the event of heavy braking or if the ABS brakes

are activated. This function means that the

brake light flashes to immediately alert cars

travelling behind.

The system is activated if ABS is used for more

than 0.5 seconds or in the event of heavy brak-

ing, however, only when braking from speeds

above 50 km/h. When the speed of the car is

lower than 30 km/h the brake lights shine nor-

mally again and the hazard warning flashers

are switched on automatically. The hazard

warning flashers remain on until the car accel-

erates again but can be deactivated with the

button for hazard warning flashers

Front fog lamps*

G 02

11 45

Button for front fog lamps.

The front fog lamps can be switched on along

with main/dipped beam or position/parking

lamps.

Press the button for on/off. The light in the but-

ton illuminates when the fog lamps are on.

NOTE

Regulations for using front fog lamps vary between different countries.

Rear fog lamp

G 02

11 46

Button for rear fog lamp.

The rear fog lamp consists of one rear lamp and

can only be switched on in combination with

main/dipped beam or the front fog lamps.

Press the button for On/Off. The rear fog lamp

indicator symbol on the combined

instrument panel and the light in the button illu-

minate when the rear fog lamp is switched on.

The rear fog lamps are switched off automati-

cally when the engine is switched off.

NOTE

Regulations for using rear fog lamps vary between different countries.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 80

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

03

81

Hazard warning flashers

G 02

11 47

Button for hazard warning flashers.

Press the button to activate the hazard warning

flashers. Both direction indicator symbols in

the combined instrument panel flash when the

hazard warning flashers are in use.

The hazard warning flashers are activated

automatically when the car brakes so suddenly

that the emergency brake lights (EBL) are acti-

vated and speed is below 30 km/h. They

remain on when the car has stopped and are

deactivated automatically when the car is

driven off again or the button is depressed.

Direction indicators/flashers

G 02

11 48

Direction indicators/flashers.

Short flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to the

first position and release. The direction

indicators flash three times.

Continuous flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to the

outer position.

The stalk switch remains in its position and is

moved back manually, or automatically by the

steering wheel movement.

Direction indicator symbols For direction indicator symbols, see page 64.

Interior lighting

G 02

11 49

Controls in roof console for the front reading lamps and passenger compartment lighting.

Reading lamp, left-hand side

Reading lamp, right-hand side

Interior lighting

All lighting in the passenger compartment can

be switched on and off manually within

30 minutes from when:

the engine has been switched off and the remote control key is in position 0

the car has been unlocked but the engine has not been started.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 81

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

03

82

Front roof lighting The front reading lamps are switched on or off

by pressing the relevant button in the roof con-

sole.

Rear roof lighting

G 02

11 50

Rear roof lighting.

The lamps are switched on or off by pressing

each respective button.

Courtesy lighting Courtesy lighting (and passenger compart-

ment lighting) is switched on and off respec-

tively when a side door is opened or closed.

Glovebox lighting Glovebox lighting is switched on and off

respectively when the lid is opened or closed.

Vanity mirror The lighting for the vanity mirror, see

page 184, is switched on and off respectively

when the cover is opened or closed.

Automatic lighting The switch for passenger compartment light-

ing has three positions for the lighting in the

passenger compartment:

Off right-hand side depressed, automatic lighting deactivated.

Neutral position automatic lighting acti- vated.

On left-hand side depressed, passenger compartment lighting on.

Neutral position When the button is in neutral position the pas-

senger compartment lighting is switched on

and off automatically in accordance with the

following:

The passenger compartment lighting is

switched on and remains on for 30 seconds if:

the car is unlocked with the remote control key or key blade, see pages 41 or 44

the engine is switched off and the remote control key is in position 0.

Passenger compartment lighting is switched

off when:

the engine is started.

the car is locked.

The passenger compartment lighting comes

on and remains on for two minutes if one of the

doors is open.

If any lighting is switched on manually and the

car is locked then it will be switched off auto-

matically after two minutes.

Home safe light duration

Some of the exterior lighting can be kept

switched on to work as home safe lighting after

the car has been locked.

1. Remove the remote control key from the

ignition switch.

2. Move the left-hand stalk switch toward the

steering wheel to the end position and

release it. The function can be activated in

the same way as with main beam flash, see

page 78.

3. Get out of the car and lock the door.

When the function is activated, dipped beam,

the parking lamps, direction indicator lamps,

door mirror lamps, number plate lighting, inner

roof lamps and courtesy lighting are switched

on.

The length of time for which the home safe

lighting should be kept on can be set under Car

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 82

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 83

settings Light settings Home safe light

duration. For a description of the menu sys-

tem, see page 116.

Approach light duration

Approach lighting is switched on with the

remote control key, see page 41, and is used

to switch on the car's lighting at a distance.

When the function is activated with the remote

control the parking lamps, direction indicator

lamps, door mirror lamps, number plate light-

ing, inner roof lamps and courtesy lighting are

switched on.

The length of time for which the approach light-

ing should be kept on can be set under Car

settings Light settings Approach light

duration. For a description of the menu sys-

tem, see page 116.

Adjusting headlamp pattern

G 02

11 51

Headlamp pattern, left-hand traffic.

G 02

11 52

Headlamp pattern, right-hand traffic.

The headlamp pattern must be adjusted to

avoid dazzling oncoming motorists and can be

set for right or left-hand traffic. The correct pat-

tern will also better illuminate the verge.

Bi-Xenon and Active Bi-Xenon

headlamps*

G 01

94 42

Headlamp control for adjusting headlamp pattern.

Normal position the headlamp pattern is

correct for the country in which the car was

delivered.

Adapted position designed for opposite

headlamp pattern.

WARNING

The headlamps must be handled with extreme care due to the Xenon lamp being supplied from a high-voltage unit.

The country in which the car is delivered deter-

mines whether normal position is designed for

right or left-hand traffic.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 83

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

03

84

Example 1 If a car that is delivered in Sweden shall be

driven in the UK then the headlamps must be

set to the adjusted position, see preceding

illustration.

Example 2 A car that is delivered in the UK is designed for

left-hand traffic and is driven there with the

headlamps in normal position, see preceding

illustration.

Halogen headlamps The headlamp pattern for halogen headlamps

is readjusted by masking the headlamp lens.

The headlamp pattern may not be as good.

Masking the headlamps 1. Copy the A and B templates for left-hand

drive cars or the C and D templates for

right-hand drive cars with a scale of 1:2,

see page 86. Use a photocopier with a

zoom function for example:

A = LHD Right (left-hand drive, right lens)

B = LHD Left (left-hand drive, left lens)

C = RHD Right (right-hand drive, right lens)

D = RHD Left (right-hand drive, left lens)

2. Transfer the template to a self-adhesive

waterproof material and cut it out. Also

mark out the red dots.

3. Position the self-adhesive templates so

that the red dots correspond with the dots

on the headlamp lenses that form refer-

ence points, see the following illustrations.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 84

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

03

85

Masking the halogen headlamps

G 03

30 25

Upper row: masking left-hand drive cars, templates A and B. Lower row: masking right-hand drive cars, templates C and D.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 85

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

03

86

Templates for halogen headlamps

G 02

11 55

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 86

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Wipers and washing

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 87

Windscreen wipers

1 2

INT

0

G 02

54 12

Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers.

Rain sensor, on/off

Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency

Windscreen wipers off Move the stalk switch to position 0 to

switch off the windscreen wipers.

Single sweep Raise the stalk switch and release to

make one sweep.

Intermittent wiping Set the number of sweeps per time

unit with the thumbwheel when inter-

mittent wiping is selected.

Continuous wiping The wipers sweep at normal speed.

The wipers sweep at high speed.

IMPORTANT

Before activating the wipers during winter - ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen in, and that any snow or ice on the wind- screen is scraped away.

IMPORTANT

Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers are cleaning the windscreen. The wind- screen must be wet when the windscreen wipers are operating.

Rain sensor* The rain sensor automatically starts the wind-

screen wipers based on how much water it

detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of

the rain sensor can be adjusted using the

thumbwheel.

When the rain sensor is activated a light in the

button the rain sensor symbol is shown

in the right-hand display in the combined

instrument panel.

Activating and setting the sensitivity When activating the rain sensor, the car must

be running or the remote control key in position

I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk switch

must be in position 0 or in the position for a

single sweep.

Activate the rain sensor by pressing the button

. The windscreen wipers make one

sweep.

Press the stalk switch up for the wipers to make

an extra sweep.

Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensi-

tivity and downward for lower sensitivity. (An

extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is

turned upward.)

Deactivating Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the but-

ton or move the stalk switch down to

another wiper program.

The rain sensor is automatically deactivated

when the key is removed from the ignition

switch or five minutes after the ignition has

been switched off.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 87

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Wipers and washing

03

88 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

IMPORTANT

The windscreen wipers could start and be damaged in an automatic car wash. Deac- tivate the rain sensor while the car is running or the remote control key is in position I or II. The symbol in the combined instrument panel and the lamp in the button go out.

Washing the headlamps and windows

G 02

54 16

Washing function.

Washing the windscreen Move the stalk switch toward the steering

wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp

washers.

The windscreen wipers will make several more

sweeps once the stalk switch has been

released. The headlamps are washed alter-

nately to prevent light intensity being reduced.

NOTE

One headlamp is washed at a time.

Heated washer nozzles* The washer nozzles are heated automatically

in cold weather to prevent the washer fluid

freezing solid.

High-pressure headlamp washing* High-pressure headlamp washing consumes a

large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the

headlamps are washed automatically at every

fifth windscreen wash cycle.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 88

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Windows, rearview and door mirrors

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 89

General

Laminated glass The glass is reinforced which pro-

vides better protection against

break-ins and improved sound insu-

lation in the passenger compartment.

The windscreen and the side windows* have

laminated glass.

G 02

18 49

Water and dirt-repellent coating* The front side windows are treated

with a coating that improves the view

in difficult weather conditions. Maintenance,

see page 260.

IMPORTANT

Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove ice from the windows. Use the defroster to remove ice from the mirrors. An ice scraper could scratch the mirror glass!

Power windows

G 01

85 16

Driver's door control panel.

Switch for electric child safety locks* and

disengaging rear power window buttons,

see page 54.

Rear window controls

Front window controls

WARNING

Check that none of the rear seat passengers is in danger of becoming trapped in any way caught when closing the windows from the driver's door.

WARNING

Make sure that children or other passengers are not in danger of becoming trapped in any way when closing the windows, in par- ticular when the remote control key is used.

WARNING

If there are children in the car, remember to always switch off the supply to the power windows by removing the remote control key if the driver leaves the car.

Operating

G 01

85 17

Operating the power windows.

Operating without auto

Operating with auto

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 89

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Windows, rearview and door mirrors

03

90 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

All power windows can be operated using the

control panel in the driver's door. Each control

panel in the other doors can only control its

own respective power window. The power win-

dows can only be controlled with one control

panel at a time.

In order that the power windows can be used

the remote control key must be in position I or

II. After the car has been running the power

windows can be operated for several minutes

even when the remote control key has been

removed, but not however after the door has

been opened.

Closing of the windows is stopped and the

window is opened if anything prevents its

movement. It is possible to force the pinch pro-

tection when closing has been interrupted, e.g.

with ice, by continuously holding the button up

until the window is closed. The pinch protec-

tion is reactivated after a brief pause.

NOTE

One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise when the rear windows are open is to also open the front windows slightly.

Operating without auto Move one of the controls up/down gently. The

power windows move up/down as long as the

control is held in position.

Operating with auto Move one of the controls up/down to the end

position and release it. The window runs auto-

matically to its end position.

Remote control and central locking

buttons All side windows can be opened/closed auto-

matically with the remote control key or the

central locking buttons:

Press and hold the lock button until the

windows start to open/close. To interrupt

opening/closing, press the lock button

again.

Resetting If the battery is disconnected then the function

for automatic opening must be reset so that it

can work correctly.

1. Gently raise the front section of the button

to raise the window to its end position and

hold it there for one second.

2. Release the button briefly.

3. Raise the front section of the button again

for one second.

WARNING

Resetting must be carried out to ensure that pinch protection works.

Sun blind*

G 02

97 68

Sun blinds are built into the panel on each rear

door.

Pull up the sun blind and hook it into the

hook in the upper door frame.

The window can also be opened and closed

when the sun blind is pulled up.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 90

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Windows, rearview and door mirrors

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 91

Door mirrors

G 01

85 18

Door mirror controls.

Adjusting 1. Press the L button for the left-hand door

mirror or the R button for the right-hand

door mirror. The light in the button illumi-

nates.

2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the

centre.

3. Press the L or R button again. The light

should no longer be illuminated.

WARNING

The mirrors are the wide angle type for opti- mum surveillance. Objects may appear fur- ther away than they actually are.

Retractable power door mirrors* The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving

in narrow spaces:

1. Press down the L and R buttons at the

same time.

2. Release them after approximately one sec-

ond. The mirrors automatically stop in the

fully retracted position.

Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L

and R buttons at the same time. The mirrors

automatically stop in the fully extended posi-

tion.

Storing the position* The mirror positions are stored in the key mem-

ory when the car has been locked with the

remote control key. When the car is unlocked

with the same remote control key the mirrors

and the driver's seat adopt the stored positions

when the driver's door is opened.

The function can be activated/deactivated

under Car Key memory Seat & mirror

positions. For a description of the menu sys-

tem, see page 116.

Angling the door mirror when parking The door mirror can be angled down for the

driver to view the side of the road when parking

for example.

Engage reverse gear and press the L or R

button.

When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror

automatically returns to its original position

after about 10 seconds, or earlier by pressing

the button labelled L or R respectively

Automatic retraction when locking When the car is locked/unlocked with the

remote control key the door mirrors are auto-

matically retracted/extended.

The function can be activated/deactivated

under Car settings Fold mirr. when

locking. For a description of the menu system,

see page 116.

Resetting to neutral Mirrors that have been moved out of position

by an external force must be reset electrically

to the neutral position for electric retracting/

extending to work correctly:

1. Retract the mirrors with the L and R but-

tons.

2. Fold them out again with the L and R but-

tons.

The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 91

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Windows, rearview and door mirrors

03

92 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Home safe and approach lighting The light on the door mirrors illuminates when

approach lighting or home safe lighting is

selected, see page 82.

Rear window and door mirror defrosters

G 02

13 41

Use the defroster to quickly remove misting

and ice from the rear window and the door mir-

rors.

Press the button once to start simultaneous

rear window and door mirror defrosting. The

light in the button indicates that the function is

active. Defrosting is deactivated automatically

and its duration is controlled by the outside

temperature.

The rear window is demisted/defrosted auto-

matically if the car is started in an outside tem-

perature lower than +7 C.

Automatic defrosting can be selected under

Climate settings Auto. rear defroster.

Select between On or Off. For a description of

the menu system, see page 116.

Interior rearview mirror

G 02

13 42

Control for dimming.

Manual dimming Bright light from behind could be reflected in

the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use

dimming with the dimming control when lights

from behind are distracting:

1. Use dimming by moving the control in

towards the passenger compartment.

2. Return to normal position by moving the

control towards the windscreen.

Automatic dimming* Bright light from behind is automatically

dimmed by the rearview mirror. The control is

not available in mirrors with automatic dim-

ming.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 92

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Power sunroof*

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 93

General

The sunroof controls are located in the roof

panel. The sunroof can be opened vertically at

the rear edge and horizontally. Key position I or

II is required for the sunroof to be opened.

Horizontal opening

G 02

13 43

Horizontal opening, backward/forward.

Opening, automatic

Opening, manual

Closing, manual

Closing, automatic

Opening For maximum sunroof opening, move the con-

trol back to the position for automatic opening

and release.

Open manually by pulling the control back-

wards to the point of resistance for manual

opening. The sunroof moves to maximum open

position as long as the button is kept

depressed.

Closing Close manually by pushing the control for-

wards to the point of resistance for manual

closing. The sunroof moves to closed position

as long as the button is kept depressed.

WARNING

Risk of crushing when sunroof is closed. The sunroof's pinch-protection function only operates during automatic closing, not manual.

Close automatically by pressing the control to

the position for automatic closing and then

release it.

The power supply to the sunroof is switched off

by removing the remote control key from the

ignition switch.

WARNING

If there are children in the car:

Remember to always switch off the power supply to the sunroof by removing the remote control key if the driver leaves the car.

Vertical opening

G 02

88 99

Vertical opening, raised at the rear edge.

Open by pressing the rear edge of the con-

trol upward.

Close by pulling the rear edge of the con-

trol down.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 93

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Power sunroof*

03

94 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Closing using the remote control key or

central locking button

G 02

13 45

One long press on the lock button closes the

sunroof and all the windows, see pages 41 and

50. The doors and the boot lid are locked. To

interrupt closing, press the lock button again.

WARNING

If the sunroof is closed using the remote control key, check that no one is in danger of becoming trapped in any way.

Sunscreen The sunroof features a manual, sliding interior

sunscreen. The sunscreen slides back auto-

matically when the sunroof is opened. Grip the

handle and slide the screen forward to close it.

Pinch protection The sunroof's pinch protection function is trig-

gered if it is blocked by an object during auto-

matic closing. If blocked, the sunroof will stop

and automatically open to the previous posi-

tion.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 94

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

03

95

Petrol and diesel engines

G 02

11 26

Ignition switch with remote control key, start and stop button (for more information, see page 70).

IMPORTANT

Do not insert the remote control key back- wards!

Grip the end with the detachable key blade, see page 44.

1. For cars with remote control key, insert the

remote control key into the ignition switch.

Gently push in the key until it is pulled in.

2. Hold the clutch pedal fully depressed 1.

Depress the brake pedal in cars with auto-

matic gearbox.

3. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button

and then release it.

NOTE

A certain delay may occur for cars with the 2.0D diesel engine before engine starting begins during this time the display shows Engine preheating.

The starter motor works until the engine has

started, but for no longer than 10 seconds (die-

sel up to 60 seconds).

If the engine has not started after 10 seconds,

try again by holding in the START/STOP

ENGINE button until the engine starts.

WARNING

Always remove the remote control key from the ignition switch when leaving the car, especially if there are children in the car.

WARNING

Never remove the remote control key from the ignition switch while driving or when the car is being towed. The steering lock could be activated which would mean that the car cannot be steered.

Never remove the remote control key with the Keyless drive* function from the car while driving or during towing.

NOTE

The idling speed can be noticeably higher than normal for certain engine types during cold starting. This is so that the emissions system can reach normal operating tem- perature as quickly as possible, which min- imises exhaust emissions and protects the environment.

Keyless drive Follow steps 23 for starting petrol and diesel

engines.

NOTE

One precondition for starting the car is that the car's remote control keys with the Key- less drive* function are located inside the passenger compartment or the cargo area.

1 If the car is moving then it is enough to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the car.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 95

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

03

96

Steering lock The steering lock is deactivated when the

remote control key is inserted into the ignition

switch 2 and activated when the remote control

key is removed from the ignition switch.

Activate the steering lock when leaving the car

to reduce the risk of car theft.

2 On cars with Keyless drive* the steering lock is deactivated when the start button is pressed in for the first time. The steering lock is activated when the engine is switched off and the driver's door is opened.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 96

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine Flexifuel

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 97

General information about starting with Flexifuel

The engine is started in the same way as in a

petrol-engined car.

In the event of starting difficulties

If the engine does not start at the first start

attempt:

Make further attempts to start with the START/STOP ENGINE button.

If the engine still does not start The outside temperature is lower than +5 C:

1. Connect the engine block heater for at

least 1 hour.

2. Make further attempts to start with the

START/STOP ENGINE button.

IMPORTANT

If the engine does not start despite repeated start attempts, contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

Engine block heater*

G 01

97 54

Electrical input to the engine block heater.

When the temperature is expected to be lower

than 10 C and the car has been refuelled with

bioethanol E85, an engine block heater should

be used for about 2 hours to facilitate the quick

starting of the engine.

The lower the temperature, the longer the time

required with the engine block heater. At

-20 C the heater should be used for approx. 3

hours.

Cars intended for E85 have an electric engine

block heater*. Starting and driving with a pre-

heated engine involves significantly lower

emissions and reduced fuel consumption. For

this reason you should aim to use the engine

block heater throughout the winter months.

WARNING

The engine block heater is powered by high voltage. Fault tracing and repair of an elec- tric engine block heater and its electrical connections must only be carried out by an authorised Volvo workshop.

NOTE

Points to remember for carrying reserve fuel:

In the event of stalling due to an empty fuel tank, bioethanol E85 from a reserve fuel can may make the engine difficult to start in extreme cold. This is avoided by filling the reserve fuel can with 95 octane petrol.

For more information on Flexifuel's bioethanol

E 85 fuel, see page 202 and 274.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 97

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine Flexifuel

03

98

Fuel adaptation

If the fuel tank is filled with petrol after the car

has been driven on bioethanol E85 (or vice

versa) then the engine may run slightly

unevenly for a time. For this reason it is impor-

tant to allow the engine to accustom itself

(adapt) to the new fuel mixture.

Adaptation takes place automatically when the

car is driven for a short period at an even

speed.

IMPORTANT

After the fuel mixture in the tank has been changed an adaptation should be made by driving at an even speed for about 15 minutes.

If the battery has been discharged or discon-

nected then a slightly longer period of driving

is required for the adaptation as the memory

for the electronics has been cleared.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 98

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine external battery

03

99

Jump starting

G 02

13 47

If the battery is flat then the car can be started

with current from another battery.

The following points are recommended when

using a donor battery in order to avoid the risk

of an explosion:

1. Set the remote control key into position 0,

see page 70.

2. Ensure that the donor battery is 12 volt.

3. If the donor battery is in another car, switch

off the donor car's engine in the other car

and ensure that the cars do not touch one

another.

4. Connect the red jump lead to the positive

terminal on the donor battery .

5. Open the clips on the front cover of the

battery in your car and remove the cover,

see page 233.

6. Connect the starter cable to the positive

terminal on the battery in your car,

located under a folding plastic cover.

7. Connect one clamp from the black jump

lead to the donor battery's negative termi-

nal .

IMPORTANT

Connect the start cable carefully to avoid short circuits with other components in the engine compartment.

8. Connect the other clamp to an earthing

point, (right-hand engine mounting at the

top, the outer screw head) . Check that

the jump lead clamps are fixed securely so

that there are no sparks during the starting

procedure.

9. Start the engine of the "donor car". Let the

engine run a few minutes at a speed slightly

higher than idle (1500 rpm).

10. Start the engine of the car with the flat bat-

tery. Do not touch the crocodile clips dur-

ing the start procedure. There is a risk of

sparks forming.

11. Remove the jump leads, first the black and

then the red. Make sure that none of the

clamps on the black jump lead comes into

contact with the battery's positive terminal

or the clamp connected to the red jump

lead.

WARNING

The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. One spark, which can be generated if you connect a jump lead incorrectly, is sufficient to make the battery explode. The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns. If the acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes, seek medical attention immediately.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 99

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Gearboxes

03

100

Manual - five-speed

G 02

13 48

Depress the clutch pedal fully during each gear change.

Take your foot off the clutch pedal between gear changes.

Follow the shifting pattern indicated.

For the best possible fuel economy, use the

highest gear possible as often as possible.

Reverse gear inhibitor - five-speed

G 02

13 49

The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibil-

ity of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse

gear during normal forward travel.

Only engage reverse gear when the car is sta-

tionary.

To engage reverse gear, the gear lever must first be put in position N. Reverse gear cannot therefore be engaged directly from fifth gear due to the reverse gear inhibitor.

Manual - six-speed

G 02

13 48

Depress the clutch pedal fully during each gear change.

Take your foot off the clutch pedal between gear changes.

Follow the shifting pattern indicated.

For the best possible fuel economy, use the

highest gear possible as often as possible.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 100

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Gearboxes

03

101

Reverse gear inhibitor - six-speed

G 02

13 49

The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibil-

ity of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse

gear during normal forward travel.

Only engage reverse gear when the car is sta-

tionary.

Automatic gearbox, Geartronic

G 02

13 50

The information display shows the position of

the gear selector using the following indica-

tions: P, R, N, D, S, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6, see

page 63.

Gear positions

Parking position (P) Select P when starting the engine or when the

car is parked. The brake pedal must be

depressed to disengage the gear selector from

the P position.

The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the

P position is engaged. Activate the electric

parking brake by pressing the button, see

page 107.

IMPORTANT

The car must be stationary when position P is selected.

Reverse (R) The car must be stationary when position R is

selected.

Neutral position (N) No gear is engaged and the engine can be

started. Apply the parking brake if the car is

stationary with the gear selector in position N.

Drive (D) D is the normal driving position. Shifting up and

down takes place automatically based on the

level of acceleration and speed. The car must

be stationary when the gear selector is moved

to position D from position R.

Geartronic manual gear positions (M) The driver can also change gear manually

using the Geartronic automatic gearbox. The

car engine-brakes when the accelerator pedal

is released.

Manual gearshift mode is obtained by moving

the lever from position D to the right-hand end

position at M. The information display shifts the

indication from D to one of the figures " 1- 6",

depending on which gear is engaged just then,

see page 63.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 101

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Gearboxes

03

102

Move the lever forwards towards + (plus) to

change up a gear and release the lever, which

returns to its rest position at M.

Pull the lever back towards (minus) to change

down a gear and release the lever.

The manual gearshift mode M can be selected

at any time while driving.

To return to automatic driving mode: move the

lever to the left-hand end position at D.

Geartronic automatically shifts down if the

driver allows the speed to decrease lower than

a level suitable for the selected gear, in order

to avoid jerking and stalling.

NOTE

If the gearbox has a Sport programme then the gearbox will only become manual after the lever has been moved forwards or back- wards in its M position. The information dis- play then shifts the indication from S to show which of the gears 16 is engaged.

Geartronic - Sport mode (S) 1

The Sport programme provides sportier cha-

racteristics and allows higher engine speed for

the gears. At the same time it responds more

quickly to acceleration. During active driving,

the use of a lower gear is prioritised, leading to

a delayed upshift.

Sport mode is obtained by moving the lever

from D position to the right-hand end position

at M. The information display shifts the indica-

tion from D to S.

Sport mode can be selected at any time while

driving.

Geartronic - Winter mode It can be easier to pull away on slippery roads

if 3rd gear is engaged manually.

1. Depress the brake pedal and move the gear lever from position D to the right-hand end position at M - the instrument panel display shifts the indication from D to the figure 1.

2. Scroll up to gear 3 by pushing the lever forward towards + (plus) twice - the display shifts the indication from 1 to 3.

3. Release the brake and accelerate carefully.

The gearbox "winter mode" means that the car

moves off with a lower engine speed and

reduced engine power on the drive wheels.

Kick-down When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the

way to the floor (beyond the position normally

regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is

immediately engaged. This is known as kick-

down.

If the accelerator is released from the kick-

down position, the gearbox automatically

changes up.

Kick-down is used when maximum accelera-

tion is needed, such as for overtaking.

Safety function To prevent overrevving the engine, the gearbox

control program has a protective downshift

inhibitor which prevents the kick-down func-

tion.

Geartronic does not permit downshifting/kick-

down which would result in an engine speed

high enough to damage the engine. Nothing

happens if the driver still tries to shift down in

this way at high engine speed the original

gear remains engaged.

When kick-down is activated the car can

change one or more gears at a time depending

on engine speed. The car changes up when the

engine reaches its maximum speed in order to

prevent damage to the engine.

1 Only on the 3.0 model.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 102

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Gearboxes

03

103

Mechanical gear selector inhibitor

G 02

13 51

The gear selector can be moved forward and

back freely between N and D. Other positions

are locked with a latch that is released with the

inhibitor button on the gear selector.

With the inhibitor button depressed the lever

can be moved forwards or backwards between

P, R, N and D.

Automatic gear selector inhibitor The automatic gearbox has special safety sys-

tems:

Keylock To remove the remote control key from the

ignition switch, the gear selector must be in the

P position. The remote control key is locked in

all other positions.

Parking position (P) Stationary car with engine running:

Keep your foot on the brake pedal when mov-

ing the gear selector to another position.

Electric gear inhibitor Shiftlock Parking

position (P) To be able to move the gear selector from P to

other gear positions, the brake pedal must be

depressed and key position II must be acti-

vated, see page 70.

Shiftlock Neutral (N) If the gear selector is in the N position and the

car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds

(irrespective of whether the engine is running)

then the gear selector is locked.

To be able to move the gear selector from N to

another gear position, the brake pedal must be

depressed and key position II must be acti-

vated, see page 70.

Deactivating the automatic gear selector

inhibitor

G 02

13 52

If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a flat

battery, the gear selector must be moved from

the P position so that the car can be moved.

Lift away the rubber mat on the floor

behind the centre console and open the

hatch.

Fully insert the key blade. Press the key

blade down and keep it held down. Move

the gear selector from the P position. For

information on the key blade, see

page 44.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 103

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

All-wheel drive AWD*

03

104 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

All Wheel Drive is always engaged

All Wheel Drive means that the car is driving on

all four wheels at the same time.

The power is automatically distributed

between the front and rear wheels. An elec-

tronically controlled clutch system distributes

the power to the wheels that have the best grip

on the current road surface. This provides the

best traction and prevents wheel spin. Under

normal driving conditions, the majority of

power is transmitted to the front wheels.

All Wheel Drive improves driving safety in rain,

snow and icy conditions.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 104

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Foot brake

03

105

General

The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If

one brake circuit is damaged then this will

mean that the brakes engage at a deeper level

and harder pressure on the pedal is needed to

produce the normal braking effect.

The driver's brake pedal pressure is reinforced

by a brake servo.

WARNING

The brake servo only works when the engine is running.

If the brake is used when the engine is switched

off then the pedal will feel stiff and more force

must be used to brake the car.

In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavy

load the brakes can be relieved by using engine

braking. Engine braking is most efficiently used

if the same gear is used downhill as up.

For more general information on heavy loads

on the car, see page 269.

Anti-lock braking system The car is equipped with ABS (Anti-lock

Braking System) which prevents the wheels

from locking during braking. This means the

ability to steer is maintained and it is easier to

swerve to avoid a hazard for example. Vibration

may be felt in the brake pedal when this is

engaged and this is normal.

A short test of the ABS system is made auto-

matically after the engine has been started

when the driver releases the brake pedal. A

further automatic test of the ABS system may

be made when the car reaches 40 km/h. The

test may be experienced as pulses in the brake

pedal.

Cleaning the brake discs Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs

may result in delayed brake function. This delay

is minimised by cleaning the brake linings.

Manual cleaning is advisable with wet road

surfaces, prior to long-stay parking and after

the car has been washed. Carry this out by

braking gently during a short period while en

route.

Emergency Brake Assistance Emergency Brake Assistance EBA (Emergency

Brake Assistance) helps to increase brake

force and so reduce braking distance. The EBA

system detects the driver's braking style and

increases brake force as necessary. The brake

force can be reinforced up to the level when the

ABS system is engaged. The EBA function is

interrupted when the pressure on the brake

pedal is reduced.

NOTE

When EBA is activated the brake pedal low- ers slightly more than usual, depress (hold) the brake pedal as long as necessary. If the brake pedal is released then all braking ceases.

Symbols in the combined instrument

panel

Symbol Specification

Constant glow Check the

brake fluid level. If the level is

low, fill with brake fluid and

check for the cause of the brake

fluid loss.

Constant glow for 2 seconds

when the engine is started

There was a fault in the brake

system's ABS function when

the engine was last running.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 105

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Foot brake

03

106

WARNING

If and illuminate at the same time then a fault may have arisen in the brake system.

If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is nor- mal at this stage, drive carefully to the near- est authorised Volvo workshop and have the brake system checked.

If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.

The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 106

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Parking brake

03

107

Parking brake, electric

An electric parking brake has the same appli-

cations as a manual parking brake, e.g. when

starting uphill.

Function A faint electric motor noise can be heard when

the parking brake is being applied. The noise

can also be heard during the automatic func-

tion checking of the parking brake.

If the car is stationary when the parking brake

is applied then it only acts on the rear wheels.

If it is applied when the car is moving then the

normal foot brake is used, i.e. the brake acts

on all four wheels. Brake function changes over

to the rear wheels when the car is almost sta-

tionary.

Low battery voltage If the battery voltage is too low then the parking

brake can neither be released nor applied.

Connect a donor battery if the battery voltage

is too low, see page 99.

How to apply the parking brake

G 02

13 54

Parking brake control

1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.

2. Press the control.

3. Release the foot brake pedal and make

sure that the car is at a standstill position.

When parking the vehicle, always engage 1st gear (for manual gearbox) or put the gear selector in position P (for automatic gearbox).

The symbol in the combined instrument

panel flashes until the parking brake is fully

applied. When the symbol illuminates the park-

ing brake is applied.

In an emergency the parking brake can be

applied when the vehicle is moving by depress-

ing the control. When the control is released or

the accelerator pedal is depressed the braking

is interrupted.

NOTE

In the event of emergency braking at speeds above 10 km/h a signal sounds during the braking procedure.

Parking on a hill If the car is parked facing uphill; turn the wheels

away from the kerb.

If the car is parked facing downhill, turn the

wheels towards the kerb.

How to release the parking brake

G 02

13 59

Parking brake control

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 107

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Parking brake

03

108

Cars with manual gearbox

Releasing manually 1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition

switch.

2. Depress the brake pedal firmly.

3. Pull the control.

NOTE

The parking brake can also be released manually by depressing the clutch pedal instead of the brake pedal. Volvo recom- mends the use of the brake pedal.

Releasing automatically 1. Start the engine.

2. Ease up the clutch and depress the accel-

erator.

IMPORTANT

It is possible to release the parking brake automatically, even when the gear lever is in neutral position, if the engine is running.

Cars with automatic gearbox

Releasing manually 1. Put the seatbelt on.

2. Insert the remote control key in the ignition

switch.

3. Depress the brake pedal firmly.

4. Pull the control.

Releasing automatically 1. Put the seatbelt on.

2. Start the engine.

3. Move the gear selector to position D or R

and depress the accelerator.

NOTE

For safety reasons, the parking brake is only released automatically if the engine is run- ning and the driver is wearing a seatbelt. The parking brake is released immediately on cars with automatic gearbox when the accelerator pedal is depressed and the gear selector is in position D or R.

Heavy load uphill A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the

car to roll backward when the parking brake is

released automatically on a steep incline.

Avoid this by depressing the control while driv-

ing off. Release the control when the engine

achieves traction.

Cars with Keyless drive function Release manually by pressing the START/

STOP ENGINE button, then depress the brake

or clutch pedal and pull the control.

Symbols

Symbol Specification

Read the message on the infor-

mation display

A flashing symbol indicates that

the parking brake is applied. If

the symbol flashes in any other

situation then this means that a

fault has arisen. Read the mes-

sage on the information display.

Messages

G 01

61 66

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 108

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Parking brake

03

109

Park brake not fully released - A fault is pre-

venting the parking brake from being released.

Contact an authorised Volvo workshop. A

warning signal sounds if you pull away with this

error message.

Parking brake not applied - A fault is pre-

venting the parking brake from being applied.

Try to apply and release. Contact a Volvo work-

shop if the message remains.

The message is also illuminated on cars with

manual gearbox when the car is driven at low

speed with the door open in order to alert the

driver that the parking brake may have been

unintentionally disengaged.

Parking brake Service required - A fault has

arisen. Contact a Volvo workshop if the fault

remains.

If the car has to be parked before the fault has

been rectified then the wheels must be turned

as if parking on a hill and 1st gear engaged

(manual gearbox) or the gear selector must be

in position P (automatic gearbox).

Replacing the brake linings The rear brake linings must be replaced by an

authorised Volvo workshop due to the design

of the electric parking brake.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 109

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

HomeLink EU*

03

110 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General

G 02

94 71

HomeLink is a programmable remote control

which can control up to three different devices

(e.g. garage door, alarm system, outdoor light-

ing and indoor lighting etc.) and in doing so

replace their remote controls. HomeLink is

supplied built into the left-hand sun visor.

HomeLink's panel consists of three program-

mable buttons and one indicator lamp.

NOTE

HomeLink is designed to be inoperable if the car is locked from the outside.

Save the original remote controls for future programming (e.g. for purchasing a new car).

Erase the programming for the buttons when selling the car.

Metallic sun visors should not be used in cars equipped with HomeLink. This could have a negative effect on the HomeLink function.

Operation When HomeLink is fully programmed it can be

used in place of the separate original remote

controls.

Press the programmed button to activate the

garage door, alarm system etc. The indicator

lamp illuminates for the time that the button is

kept depressed.

NOTE

In the event that the ignition is not activated, HomeLink operates for 30 minutes after the driver's door has been opened.

The original remote controls can of course be

used in parallel with HomeLink.

WARNING

If HomeLink is used to operate a garage door or gate, ensure that nobody is in the vicinity of the door or gate while it is in motion.

Do not use the HomeLink remote control for any garage door that does not have safety stop and safety reverse. The garage door must react immediately when it detects that something is preventing its movement, and stop directly and reverse. A garage door without these characteristics could cause personal injury. For further information, ring the HomeLink Hotline: 008000 466 354 65 (free of charge). They can also be contacted via the Internet: www.homelink.com.

Programming for the first time The first step erases the memory in HomeLink

and must not be carried out when only one

individual button is being reprogrammed.

1. Depress the two outer buttons and do not

release until the indicator lamp starts to

flash after approx. 20 seconds. The flash-

ing indicates that HomeLink is set in "learn

mode" and is ready to be programmed.

2. Position the original remote control 2-8 cm

from HomeLink. Monitor the indicator

lamp.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 110

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

HomeLink EU*

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 111

The particular distance that is required

between the original remote control and

HomeLink depends on the programming of

the device in question. Perhaps several

attempts will be required at different dis-

tances. Maintain each position for approx.

15 seconds before trying a new one.

3. Depress the button for the original remote

control and the button to be programmed

on HomeLink simultaneously. Do not

release the buttons until the indicator lamp

has changed over from slow to rapid flash-

ing. The rapid flashing indicates successful

programming.

4. Test the programming by depressing the

programmed button on HomeLink and

watching the indicator lamp:

Constant glow: The indicator lamp illu- minates with a constant glow when the button is kept depressed, this indicates that the programming is complete. The garage door, gate or similar should now be activated when the programmed HomeLink button is depressed.

Glow not constant: The indicator lamp flashes quickly for approx. 2 seconds and then changes over to a constant glow for approx. 3 seconds. This proc- ess is repeated for approx. 20 seconds

and indicates that the device has a "roll- ing code". The garage door, gate or sim- ilar is not activated when the pro- grammed HomeLink button is depressed. Continue the programming in accordance with the following.

5. Locate the "programming button 1" on the

receiver for the garage door for example,

normally located close to the antenna's

bracket on the receiver. If you have diffi-

culty in finding the button, look in the man-

ufacturer's manual or call the HomeLink

Hotline: 008000 466 354 65 (free of

charge). They can also be contacted via

the Internet: www.homelink.com

6. Depress and release the "programming

button". The button flashes for approx. 30

seconds and the next step must be carried

out within this period.

7. Depress the programmed button on

HomeLink, while the "programming but-

ton" is still flashing, keep it depressed for

approx. 3 seconds and then release.

Repeat the press/hold/release sequence

up to 3 times to conclude the program-

ming.

Programming individual buttons To reprogram an individual button, proceed in

accordance with the following:

1. Depress the required button on HomeLink

and do not release until step 3 has been

completed.

2. When the indicator lamp on HomeLink

starts to flash, after approx. 20 seconds,

position the original remote control 2-8 cm

from HomeLink. Monitor the indicator

lamp.

The particular distance that is required

between the original remote control and

HomeLink depends on the programming of

the device in question. Perhaps several

attempts will be required at different dis-

tances. Maintain each position for approx.

15 seconds before trying a new one.

3. Depress the button on the original remote

control. The indicator lamp will start to

flash. When the flashing has changed over

from a slow to a rapid flashing - release

both buttons. The rapid flashing indicates

successful programming.

4. Test the programming by depressing the

programmed button on HomeLink and

watching the indicator lamp:

1 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 111

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

HomeLink EU*

03

112 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Constant glow: The indicator lamp illu- minates with a constant glow when the button is kept depressed, this indicates that the programming is complete. The garage door, gate or similar should now be activated when the programmed HomeLink button is depressed.

Glow not constant: The indicator lamp flashes quickly for approx. 2 seconds and then changes over to a constant glow for approx. 3 seconds. This proc- ess is repeated for approx. 20 seconds and indicates that the device has a "roll- ing code". The garage door, gate or sim- ilar is not activated when the pro- grammed HomeLink button is depressed. Continue the programming in accordance with the following.

5. Locate the "programming button 2" on the

receiver for the garage door for example,

normally located close to the antenna's

bracket on the receiver. If you have diffi-

culty in finding the button, look in the man-

ufacturer's manual or call the HomeLink

Hotline: 008000 466 354 65 (free of

charge). They can also be contacted via

the Internet: www.homelink.com

6. Depress and release the "programming

button". The button flashes for approx. 30

seconds and the next step must be carried

out within this period.

7. Depress the programmed button on

HomeLink, while the "programming but-

ton" is still flashing, keep it depressed for

approx. 3 seconds and then release.

Repeat the press/hold/release sequence

up to 3 times to conclude the program-

ming.

Erasing programming It is only possible to erase the programming for

all the buttons on HomeLink, not for individual

buttons.

Depress the two outer buttons and do not

release until the indicator lamp starts to

flash after approx. 20 seconds.

> HomeLink is now set in so-called "learn

mode" and is ready to be programmed

once more, see page 110.

2 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 112

henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

03

113

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 113

henrikrosenqvist

G 02

09 08

114 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Menus and messages........................................................................... 116

Climate control...................................................................................... 121

Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*................................................... 129

Fuel-driven additional heater*............................................................... 132

Audio system........................................................................................ 133

RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system - Dual Screen* ....................... 144

Trip computer........................................................................................ 149

Compass*.............................................................................................. 151

DSTC Stability and traction control system....................................... 152

Adapting driving characteristics........................................................... 153

Cruise control*...................................................................................... 154

Adaptive cruise control*........................................................................ 155

Distance Alert........................................................................................ 161

Collision Warning with Auto Brake*...................................................... 164

Driver Alert System DAC*................................................................... 169

Driver Alert System - LDW*................................................................... 172

Park Assist*........................................................................................... 175

BLIS* Blind Spot Information System................................................ 178

Comfort inside the passenger compartment........................................ 182

Comfort inside the passenger compartment - Executive..................... 185

Bluetooth handsfree*............................................................................ 186

Built-in phone*...................................................................................... 191

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 114

henrikrosenqvist

04 COMFORT AND DRIVING PLEASURE

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 115

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages

04

116 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Centre console

Some functions are controlled from the centre

console via the menu system or via the keypad

in the steering wheel. Each function is descri-

bed under its respective section.

The current menu level is shown at the top right

of the centre console's display.

Centre console controls

G 02

13 60

Centre console with information display and con- trols for menus.

Navigation button scrolls and selects

among menu options

ENTER selects menu options

MENU leads to the menu system

EXIT leads back one step in the menu

structure. A long press leads out from the

menu system.

Steering wheel keypad

G 02

13 63

ENTER*

EXIT*

Navigation buttons up/down.

If the steering wheel keypad has ENTER and

EXIT then these buttons, and the navigation

buttons, have the same functions as the con-

trols in the centre console.

Search paths Access to some functions is provided directly

via the function buttons and some are reached

via the menu system.

The search paths to the menu system's func-

tions are stated in the form: Car settings

Lock settings, which presupposes that fol-

lowing is carried out before:

1. Press MENU.

2. Scroll to Menu and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Submenu and press ENTER.

The navigation button can be used instead of

ENTER and EXIT when navigating the menu

hierarchy. The right-hand arrow is equal to

ENTER and the left-hand arrow to EXIT.

The menu options are numbered and can also

be selected directly with the numerical keypad

(only 1 9).

Menu overview The phone and audio sources have different

main menus. The following menus are included

in all main menus:

Car Key memory

Seat & mirror positions*

Car settings

Fold mirr. when locking*

Collision warning settings*

Information

Light settings

Lock settings

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 116

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 117

Reduced Guard 1

Parking camera settings*

Steering force level*

Unit settings

Climate settings

Automatic blower adjust

Auto. rear defroster

Recirculation timer

Reset climate settings

Main menu AM

Audio settings 2

Sound stage

Equalizer front

Equalizer rear

Auto. volume control

Reset the audio settings

Main menu FM

FM settings

News

TP (Traffic information)

Radio text

PTY (Program type)

Advanced radio settings

Audio settings

Main menu DAB* 3

Main menu CD

Random

Off

Folder 4

Disc4

Single disc 5

All discs5

CD settings

Disc text*

News

TP (Traffic information)

Audio settings

Main menu AUX

AUX input volume

Audio settings

Main menu, Bluetooth

Last 10 missed calls

Last 10 received calls

Last 10 dialled calls

Phone book

Search

Copy fr. mobile phone

Bluetooth*

Connect phone

Change phone

Remove phone

Phone settings

Call options

Sounds and volume

Synchronise phone book

1 Certain models. 2 The menu option for audio settings is available in all audio sources. 3 See page 141. 4 Only in systems that allow the playback of MP3 and WMA format audio files. 5 Only in systems with CD changer.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 117

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages

04

118

Main menu, built-in phone

Call register

Last 10 missed calls

Last 10 received calls

Last 10 dialled calls

Erase list

Call duration

Phone book

New contact

Search

Copy all

Erase SIM

Erase phone

Memory status

Messages

Read

Write new

Message settings

Call options

Send my number

Call waiting

Automatic answer

Voice mail number

Diversions

Phone settings

Network selection

SIM security

Edit PIN code

Sounds and volume

IDIS

Reset Phone settings

Combined instrument panel

G 02

13 64

Information display and controls for menus.

READ access to message list and mes-

sage confirmation.

Thumbwheel browse between menu

options.

RESET reset the active function. Used in

certain cases to select/activate a function,

see the explanation under each respective

function.

The menus shown on the information displays

in the combined instrument panel are con-

trolled with the left-hand stalk switch. The

menus shown depend on key position, see

page 70. If a message appears then this must

be acknowledged with READ for the menus to

be shown.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 118

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages

04

119

Menu overview 6

To empty fuel tank

Average

Instantaneous

Average speed

Lane departure warning

Tyre pressure Calibration

Current speed

Park heat timer 1/2

Park vent timer 1/2

Park timer mode

Direct start Park heat

Direct start Park el.heat

Direct start Park vent

Additional heat auto

Rest heat start

DSTC

Message

G 02

13 65

Text message in the information display.

When a warning, information or indicator sym-

bol illuminates, a corresponding message

appears on the information display. An error

message is stored in a memory list until the

fault is rectified.

Press READ to acknowledge and browse

between the messages.

NOTE

If a warning message appears while you are using the trip computer, the message must be read (press READ) before the previous activity can be resumed.

Message Specification

Stop safely Stop and switch off the

engine. Serious risk of

damage. Contact an

authorised Volvo work-

shop.

Stop engine Stop and switch off the

engine. Serious risk of

damage. Contact an

authorised Volvo work-

shop.

Service urgent Have the car checked

by an authorised Volvo

workshop immediately.

Service

required

Have the car checked

by an authorised Volvo

workshop as soon as

possible.

See manual Read the owner's man-

ual.

Book time for

maintenance

Time to book regular

service at an authorised

Volvo workshop.

6 Certain menu options *.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 119

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages

04

120

Message Specification

Time for regular

maintenance

Time for regular service

at an authorised Volvo

workshop. The timing is

determined by the num-

ber of kilometres driven,

number of months

since the last service,

engine running time and

oil grade.

Maintenance

overdue

If the service intervals

are not followed then

the warranty does not

cover any damaged

parts. Contact an

authorised Volvo work-

shop for service.

Temporarily

OFF

A function has been

temporarily switched

off and is reset auto-

matically while driving

or after starting again.

Power save

mode

The audio system is

switched off to save

energy. Charge the bat-

tery.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 120

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate control

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 121

General

Air conditioning The car is equipped with Electronic Climate

Control (ECC). The climate control system

cools or heats as well as dehumidifies the air in

the passenger compartment.

NOTE

The air conditioning can be switched off, but to ensure the best possible climate comfort in the passenger compartment and to pre- vent the windows from misting, it should always be on.

Actual temperature The temperature you select corresponds to the

physical experience with reference to factors

such as air speed, humidity and solar radiation

etc. in and around the car.

The system includes a sun sensor which

detects on which side the sun is shining into

the passenger compartment. This means that

the temperature can differ between the right

and left-hand air vents despite the controls

being set for the same temperature on both

sides.

Sensor location

The sun sensor is located on the top side of the dashboard.

The temperature sensor for the passenger compartment is located below the climate control panel.

The outside temperature sensor is located on the door mirror.

The humidity sensor* is located in the inte- rior rearview mirror.

NOTE

Do not cover or block the sensors with clothing or other objects.

Side windows and sunroof To ensure that the air conditioning works opti-

mally, the side windows, and sunroof if appro-

priate, should be closed.

Misting windows Remove misting on the insides of the windows

by primarily using the defroster function.

To reduce the risk of misting, clean the win-

dows with normal window cleaning agent.

Vents in the parcel shelf

NOTE

To avoid misting, do not block the vents fur- thest back on the parcel shelf with clothing or other objects.

Temporary shut-off of the air

conditioning When the engine requires full power, e.g. for full

acceleration or driving uphill with a trailer, the

air conditioning can be temporarily switched

off. There may then be a temporary increase in

temperature.

Condensation In warm weather, condensation from the air

conditioning may drip under the car. This is

normal.

Ice and snow Remove ice and snow from the climate control

system air intake (the grille between the bonnet

and the windscreen).

Fault tracing and repair Entrust fault tracing and repair of the climate

control system to an authorised Volvo work-

shop only.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 121

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate control

04

122

Refrigerant The climate control system contains R134a

refrigerant. This refrigerant contains no chlo-

rine, which means that it is harmless to the

ozone layer. Have an authorised Volvo work-

shop carry out the filling/changing of refriger-

ant.

Total airing function The function opens/closes all side windows

simultaneously and can be used for example to

quickly air the car during hot weather, see

page 42.

Passenger compartment filter All air entering the car's passenger compart-

ment is cleaned with a filter. This must be

replaced at regular intervals. Follow the Volvo

Service Programme for the recommended

replacement intervals. If the car is used in a

severely contaminated environment, it may be

necessary to replace the filter more often.

NOTE

There are different types of passenger com- partment filter. Make sure that the correct filter is fitted.

Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) This option keeps the passenger compartment

clear of allergy and asthma inducing sub-

stances. For more information on CZIP, see the

brochure included with the purchase of the car.

The following is included:

An enhanced fan function that means that the fan starts when the car is opened with the remote control key. The fan fills the passenger compartment with fresh air. The function starts when required and is dis- engaged automatically after a time or when one of the passenger compartment doors is opened. The time interval during which the fan blows will be gradually reduced until the car is 4 years old.

Interior Air Quality System (IAQS). A fully automatic system that cleans the air in the passenger compartment from contami- nants such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-level ozone.

Use of tested materials in the interior

equipment. The materials have been developed in order to

minimise the quantity of dust in the passenger

compartment and they contribute to making

the passenger compartment easier to keep

clean. The carpets in both the passenger com-

partment and the cargo area are removable

and easy to remove and clean. Use cleaning

agents and car care products recommended

by Volvo, see page 260.

NOTE

In cars with CZIP the IAQS air filter must be replaced every 15000 km or once per year. In cars without CZIP the IAQS air filter must be replaced at the normal service.

Menu settings It is possible to change the default settings for

three of the climate control system's functions

via the centre console, see page 116:

Fan speed in automatic mode, see page 125.

Recirculation timer for passenger com- partment air, see page 126.

Automatic rear window defrosting, see page 92.

All climate control system functions are set to

original position with RESET via the display.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 122

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate control

04

123

Air distribution

G 02

13 66

The incoming air is divided between 20different

vents in the passenger compartment.

Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO

mode.

If necessary it can be controlled manually, see

page 127.

Air vents in the dashboard

G 02

13 67

Open

Closed

Lateral airflow

Vertical airflow

Aim the outer vents at the side windows to

remove misting.

A certain air flow always comes from the vents

in order to maintain a good climate in the pas-

senger compartment.

Air vents in the door pillars

G 02

13 68

Open

Closed

Lateral airflow

Vertical airflow

Aim the vents at the windows to remove mist-

ing.

Aim the vents into the passenger compartment

to maintain a comfortable climate in the rear

seat.

Remember that small children may be sensitive

to air flows and draughts.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 123

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate control

04

124 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Climate control

Electronic climate control, ECC

G 02

13 71

Ventilated front seats*, left-hand side

Fan

Heated front seats, left-hand side

Air distribution

Heated front seats, right-hand side

AUTO

Ventilated front seats*, right-hand side

Temperature control, right-hand side

AC ON/OFF Air conditioning On/Off

Rear window and door mirror defrosters,

see page 92

Max. defroster

Recirculation/Air quality system

Temperature control, left-hand side

Operation

Ventilated front seats* Ventilated front seats can only

be specified when ECC is

installed in the car. The venti-

lation system consists of fans

in the seats and backrests

that draw air through the seat

upholstery. The cooling effect

increases the cooler the passenger compart-

ment air becomes.

The ventilation is regulated from the climate

control and takes seat temperature, solar radi-

ation and outside temperature into considera-

tion.

The ventilation can be used at the same time

as seat heating. For example, the function can

be used to dry damp from clothing.

The ventilation system can be activated when

the engine is running. There are three comfort

levels that produce different cooling and dehu-

midification outputs:

Comfort level III: press the button once for maximum output three lamps illuminate.

Comfort level II: press the button twice for lower output two lamps illuminate.

Comfort level I: press the button three times for the lowest output one lamp illu- minates.

Press the button four times to switch off the

function no lamps illuminate.

NOTE

The seat ventilation should be used carefully by people sensitive to draughts. Comfort level one is recommended for long-term use.

IMPORTANT

The seat ventilation cannot be started when passenger compartment temperature is below 5 C. This is to avoid chilling anyone sitting in the seat.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 124

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate control

04

125

Fan 1

Turn the knob to increase or

decrease fan speed. If AUTO

is selected then fan speed is

regulated automatically. The

previously set fan speed is

disengaged.

NOTE

If the fan is fully disengaged the air condi- tioning is not engaged which may result in a risk of misting windows.

Heated seats

Front seats Press the button once for the

highest heat level three

lamps illuminate.

Press the button twice for a

lower heat level two lamps

illuminate.

Press the button three times for the lowest heat

level one lamp illuminates.

Press the button four times to switch off the

heat no lamps illuminate.

Rear seats (Executive)

G 02

13 76

Heat control takes place in the same way as for

the front seat 2.

Air distribution The figure consists of three

buttons. When the buttons

are pressed a lamp in front of

the respective part of the fig-

ure illuminates and shows

which air distribution is

selected, see page 127.

Auto The function automatically

regulates temperature, air

conditioning, fan speed, recir-

culation, and air distribution.

If you select one or more manual functions, the

other functions continue to be controlled auto-

matically. The air quality sensor is engaged and

all manual settings are switched off when

AUTO is pressed. The display shows AUTO

CLIMATE.

Fan speed in automatic mode can be set under

Climate settings Automatic blower

adjust. Select between Low, Normal or

High.

For a description of the menu system, see

page 116.

Temperature control The temperatures on the

driver and passenger sides

can be set independently.

When the car is started, the

most recent setting is

resumed.

1 Only applies to ECC. 2 Not included if 2-stage booster cushion is selected.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 125

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate control

04

126 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

NOTE

Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by selecting a higher/lower temperature than the actual temperature required.

AC Air conditioning on/off The air conditioning is con-

trolled automatically by the

system when the ON lamp is

on. This way, incoming air is

sufficiently cooled and dehu-

midified.

When the OFF lamp is on, the air conditioning

is always disengaged. Other functions are still

controlled automatically. When defroster is

selected, the air conditioning system is set for

maximum dehumidification.

Defroster Used to quickly remove mist-

ing and ice from the wind-

screen and side windows. Air

flowing to the windows. The

light in the defroster button

illuminates when the function

is active.

The following also takes place in order to pro-

vide maximum dehumidification in the passen-

ger compartment:

the air conditioning is automatically engaged

recirculation is automatically disengaged.

The air conditioning can be disengaged man-

ually using the AC button. When the defroster

function is switched off the climate control sys-

tem returns to the previous settings.

Recirculation/Air quality system

Recirculation When recirculation is

engaged the right-hand

orange light in the button illu-

minates. The function is

selected to shut out bad air,

exhaust gases etc. from the

passenger compartment. The

air in the passenger compartment is recircula-

ted, i.e. no outside air is taken into the car when

this function is activated. If the air in the car

recirculates for too long, there is a risk of mist-

ing on the insides of the windows.

Timer With the timer function activated the system

will exit manually activated recirculation mode

according to a time that depends on the out-

side temperature. This reduces the risk of ice,

misting and bad air. Activate/deactivate the

function under Climate settings

Recirculation timer. For a description of the

menu system, see page 116.

NOTE

When Defroster is selected, recirculation is always deactivated.

Air quality system* The air quality system sepa-

rates gases and particles to

reduce the levels of odours

and pollution in the passenger

compartment. If the outside

air is contaminated then the

air intake is closed and the air

is recirculated. When the AUTO button is

depressed the air quality sensor is always

engaged.

Activating the air quality sensor. Switch between the three

functions by pressing the but-

ton repeatedly.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 126

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate control

04

127

The left-hand orange lamp illuminates the air quality sensor is disengaged.

The centre green lamp illuminates recir- culation not engaged, providing it is not required for cooling in hot weather.

The right-hand orange lamp illuminates recirculation is engaged.

NOTE

The air quality sensor should always be engaged in order to obtain the best air in the passenger compartment.

Recirculation is limited in cold weather to avoid misting.

If the insides of the windows start misting up, disengage the air quality sensor, and the defroster functions for the windscreen, the side and the rear windows should also be used to demist the windows.

Air distribution table

Air distribution Use Air distribution Use

Air to windows. Some air

flows from the air vents.

The air is not recirculated.

Air conditioning is always

engaged.

To remove ice and mist-

ing quickly.

Air to the floor and win-

dows. Some air flows

from the dashboard air

vents.

To ensure comfortable

conditions and good

demisting in cold or

humid weather.

Air to windscreen and

side windows. Some air

flows from the air vents.

To prevent misting and

icing in a cold and humid

climate, (not at too low fan

speed to enable this).

Air to floor and from dash-

board air vents.

In sunny weather with

cool outside tempera-

tures.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 127

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate control

04

128

Air distribution Use Air distribution Use

Airflow to windows and

from dashboard air vents.

To ensure good comfort

in warm, dry weather.

Air to floor. Some air flows

to the dashboard air vents

and windows.

To direct heat or cold to

the floor

Airflow to the head and

chest from the dashboard

air vents.

To ensure efficient cool-

ing in warm weather.

Airflow to windows, from

dashboard air vents and

to the floor.

To provide cooler air

along the floor or warmer

air higher up in cold

weather or hot, dry

weather.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 128

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 129

Fuel-driven heater

General information about the parking

heater The parking heater heats the engine and pas-

senger compartment and can be started

directly or with the timer.

Two different times can be selected using the

timer. Here, time refers to the time when the car

is heated and ready. The car's electronic sys-

tem calculates when heating should be started

based on the outside temperature.

The heater cannot start if the outside tempera-

ture exceeds 15 C. At 10 C or lower the

maximum running time of the parking heater is

50 minutes.

WARNING

The car must be outdoors when the parking heater is used.

NOTE

When the parking heater is active there may be smoke from the right-hand wheel hous- ing, which is perfectly normal.

Refuelling

WARNING! AVERTISSEMENT!

ACHTUNG!

G 02

13 95

Warning decal on fuel filler flap.

WARNING

Fuel which spills out can be ignited. Switch off the fuel-driven heater before starting to refuel.

Check the information display to see that the parking heater is switched off. When it is running, the information display shows Park heat ON.

Parking on a hill If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of

the car should point downhill to ensure that

there is a supply of fuel to the parking heater.

Battery and fuel If the battery has insufficient charge or the fuel

level is too low, the parking heater will be

switched off automatically and a message

appears on the information display. Acknowl-

edge the message by pressing the indicator

stalk READ button once, see page 130.

IMPORTANT

Repeated use of the parking heater com- bined with short journeys may discharge the battery and impair starting.

The car should be driven for the same time as the heater is used to ensure that the car's battery is recharged adequately to replace the energy consumed by the heater when it is used on a regular basis.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 129

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*

04

130 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Operation

G 02

13 64

READ button

Thumbwheel

RESET button

For more information on the information dis-

play and READ, see page 118.

Symbols and display messages

When one of the timer's settings or

Direct start is activated, the infor-

mation symbol in the combined instrument

panel illuminates while the information display

shows an explanatory text and a further illumi-

nated symbol. The table shows symbols and

display texts that appear.

Sym- bol

Display Specification

G 02

51 02

Fuel

heater ON

The heater is

switched on and run-

ning.

G 02

51 02

Timer is

set for

Fuel

heater

Reminder that the

heater will start at

the set time after the

car has been left,

when the remote

control key is

removed from the

ignition switch.

Heater

stopped

Low bat-

tery

The heater has been

stopped by the car's

electronics in order

to facilitate starting

the engine.

Heater

stopped -

Low fuel

level

The heater has been

stopped by the car's

electronics in order

to facilitate starting

the engine and about

50 km driving.

A display text clears automatically after a time

or after one press on the indicator stalk

READ button.

Direct start and immediate stop

1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Direct start

Park heat.

2. Press RESET to select between ON and

OFF.

ON: Parking heater switched on manually or

with programmed timer.

OFF: Parking heater switched off.

Following the direct start of the heater it will be

activated for 50 minutes.

Heating of the passenger compartment will

begin as soon as the engine coolant has

reached the correct temperature.

NOTE

The car can be started and driven while the parking heater is running.

Setting the timer

The time when the car shall be used and heated

is specified with the timer.

Select between TIMER 1 and TIMER 2.

NOTE

The time can only be programmed in key position I, see page 70.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 130

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 131

1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Park heat

timer 1.

2. Briefly press RESET to move to the flash-

ing hours setting.

3. Select the required hour using the thumb-

wheel.

4. Briefly press RESET to move to the flash-

ing minutes setting.

5. Select the required minute using the

thumbwheel.

6. Briefly press RESET to confirm the setting.

7. Press RESET to activate the timer.

After setting Park heat timer 1 a second start

time can be programmed with Park heat timer

2 by scrolling to it with the thumbwheel.

Set the alternative time in the same way as

Park heat timer 1.

Deactivating a timer-started heater A timer-started heater can be switched off

manually before the set time has elapsed. Pro-

ceed as follows:

1. Press READ.

2. Use the thumbwheel to scroll to the text

Park heat timer 1 or 2.

> The text ON flashes on the display.

3. Press RESET.

> The text OFF is shown with a constant

glow and the heater is switched OFF.

A timer-started heater can be switched off in

accordance with the instructions in the section

"Direct start and immediate stop", see

page 130.

Clock/timer The heater's time is connected to the car's

clock.

NOTE

All timer programming will be cleared if the car's clock is reset.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 131

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Fuel-driven additional heater*

04

132 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Additional heater (diesel)

G 02

13 64

READ button

Thumbwheel

RESET button

In diesel-engined cars the additional heater

may be required for achieving the correct tem-

perature in the passenger compartment during

cold weather.

The heater starts automatically when extra

heat is required when the engine is running.

The heater is switched off automatically when

the correct temperature is reached or when the

engine is switched off.

NOTE

When the additional heater is active there may be smoke from the right-hand wheel housing which is perfectly normal.

Auto mode or shutdown The additional heater can be switched off for

short distances if required.

1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Additional

heat auto.

2. Press RESET to select between ON and

OFF.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 132

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 133

General

The audio system can be equipped with differ-

ent options and different versions. There are

three system versions:

Performance

High Performance

Premium Sound

The system version is shown in the display

when the audio system is started.

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II and the Dolby

symbol are trademarks of Dolby

Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby

Surround Pro Logic II System is manufactured

under license from Dolby Laboratories

Licensing Corporation.

Remote control key and key positions The audio system can be used without the

remote control key in the ignition switch for

15 minutes at a time.

NOTE

Remove the remote control key from the ignition switch if the audio system is used when the engine is switched off. This is to avoid discharging the battery unnecessar- ily.

If the audio system is active when the engine is

switched off then it is activated automatically

next time the engine is started.

Overview

G 02

13 98

Input for external audio source (AUX, USB/

iPod*)

Steering wheel keypad

Centre console control panel

Control panel with headphones socket*

Steering wheel keypad

G 02

13 99

Confirm selection in menu system, accept

phone call.

Lead up in menu system. Interrupt current

function, end/refuse phone calls, clear

entered characters.

Volume

A short press scrolls between CD tracks or

preset radio stations. A long press fast-

winds CD tracks or searches radio stations

automatically.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 133

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

04

134

Rear control panel with headphones socket

Headphones with an impedance of

16-32 ohm and sensitivity of 102 dB or higher

are recommended for best sound reproduc-

tion.

G 02

14 00

Volume

Scroll/search forward and backward

Audio source, activating

Headphones sockets (3.5 mm)

Activating/deactivating The control panel is activated with MODE

when the audio system is active. Deactivation

is automatic when the audio system is deacti-

vated or with a long press on MODE.

Scroll/search forward and backward

Short presses on are used to scroll between

CD tracks or preset radio stations. Long

presses are used to fast-wind CD tracks or to

search for radio stations automatically.

Limitations

The audio source (FM, AM, CD etc.) played back in the speakers cannot be controlled from the rear control panel.

Menus and MY KEY 1

Some functions are controlled from the menu

system in the centre console. For more infor-

mation on menus, see page 116. For informa-

tion on the audio system's functions together

with BluetoothTM handsfree or phone, see

page 192.

Store favourite functions with MY KEY

G 01

77 52

1. Select the function to be stored in the

menu. Only a selection of the functions can

be stored.

2. Hold MY KEY depressed for more than

2 seconds.

The following functions can be stored

with MY KEY: CD/CD changer

Random (CD changer)

News

TP

Track information

1 The MY KEY function is not available if the car is equipped with built-in phone as an option.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 134

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

04

135

FM

News

TP

Radio text

Search PTY

Show PTY text

AUDIO SETTINGS

Sound setting

Auto. volume control

Activate the stored function with a short press

on MY KEY.

Audio functions

G 02

14 02

Centre console, controls for audio functions.

Internal audio sources: AM, FM and CD

External audio source. For connection, see

page 133

Push button and knob controls for adjust-

ing the sound pattern

Navigation button

Volume and on/off

Audio volume and automatic volume

control The audio system compensates for disrupting

noises in the passenger compartment by

increasing the volume with the speed of the

car. The level of compensation can be set at

low, medium or high. Select the level under

Audio settings Auto. volume control.

External audio source audio volume The AUX input can be used for connecting an

MP3 player for example, see page 133.

NOTE

The audio quality may be impaired if the player is charged while the audio system is in AUX mode. In which case, avoid charging the player via the 12 V socket.

Sometimes the AUX external audio source can

be heard at a different volume to the internal

audio sources. If the audio volume of the exter-

nal audio source is too high then the sound

quality can be impaired. Prevent this by adjust-

ing the input volume of the AUX input:

1. Set the audio system in AUX mode using

MODE and navigate with to AUX input

volume.

2. Turn the control or press / the

navigation button.

Audio controls

Press the control repeatedly to browse

among the following listed options.

Adjustment is made by turning the control.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 135

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

04

136 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

NOTE

Press MENU to access the audio settings. For more information, see page 116.

Bass - Bass level.

Treble - Treble level.

Fader Balance between the front and rear speakers.

Balance Balance between the left and right-hand speakers.

Subwoofer* - Bass speaker level. Turning

the control anticlockwise to MIN deac-

tivates the Subwoofer.

Surround* - Surround settings.

Under Surround 3 channel stereo or Dolby

Surround Pro Logic II can be activated by

selecting 3-ch or Dpl2 respectively. This ena-

bles the following options:

Centre level* - Level for centre speaker.

Surround level* - Level for surround.

Equalizer

The equalizer 2 can be used to adjust different

frequency bands separately.

1. Go to Audio settings and select

Equalizer front or Equalizer rear.

The sound level for the wavelength is

adjusted with / on the navigation but-

ton. Press / to select another wave-

length.

2. Use ENTER to save or EXIT to close.

Sound stage The sound experience can be optimised for the

driver's seat*, both front seats or the rear seat.

Select one of the options under

Audio settings Sound stage.

Optimum sound reproduction The audio system is calibrated for optimum

sound reproduction by means of digital signal

processing.

This calibration takes into account loudspeak-

ers, amplifiers, passenger compartment

acoustics, listener position etc. for each com-

bination of car model and audio system.

There is a also a dynamic calibration that takes

into account the position of the volume control,

radio reception and vehicle speed.

The controls explained in these operating

instructions, e.g. Bass, Treble and

Equalizer, are only intended for the user to be

able to adapt the sound reproduction accord-

ing to personal taste.

CD functions

G 02

14 03

Centre console, controls for CD functions.

CD eject

CD insert and eject slot

Navigation button for changing CD tracks

Fast-wind and change CD track

CD changer position selection*

Scan CD

Start playback (CD player) If a music CD is in the player when CD is

pressed then playback is started automatically.

Otherwise, insert a disc and press CD.

2 Certain audio levels

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 136

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

04

137

Start playback (CD changer) If a CD position with a music CD is already

selected when CD is pressed then playback

starts automatically. Otherwise, select a disc

with the number buttons 16 or / on the

navigation button.

Insert a CD (CD changer) 1. Select an empty position with the number

buttons 16 or / on the navigation

button.

An empty position is marked on the dis-

play. The text Insert Disc shows that a

new disc can be inserted. The CD changer

can hold up to six CDs.

2. Insert a CD in the CD changer slot.

Disc eject A CD will stay in the ejected position for

approx. 12seconds. Following which it is re-

inserted in the player and playback continues.

Eject individual discs by pressing the eject but-

ton.

Eject all discs with a long press on the eject

button. The entire magazine is emptied disc by

disc.

Pause If the volume is turned down completely, the

CD player is stopped. The player is restarted

when volume is increased.

Audio files 3

The CD player also supports MP3 and WMA

format audio files.

NOTE

Some copy protected audio files may not be read by the player.

When a CD containing audio files is inserted

into the player the disc's directory structure is

read in. It may take a while before playback

starts depending on the quality of the disc.

Navigation and playback If a disc containing audio files is inside the CD

player then ENTER leads to the disc's direc-

tory structure. The directory structure is navi-

gated in the same way as the audio system's

menu structure. Audio files have the symbol

and directories have the symbol .

Start audio file playback with ENTER.

When the playback of a file is finished the play-

back of the other files in the same directory

continues. Directory change takes place auto-

matically when all files in the current directory

have been played back.

Fast-wind/change CD tracks and audio

files

Short presses / on the navigation button

are used to scroll between CD tracks/audio

files. Long presses are used to fast-wind CD

tracks/audio files. The steering wheel keypad

can also be used for this purpose. Track

change can also be made by turning

TUNING.

Scan CD This function plays the first ten seconds of

each CD track/audio file. Press SCAN to acti-

vate. Interrupt with EXIT or SCAN to continue

playback of the current CD track/audio file.

Random This function plays the tracks in random order.

The random CD tracks/audio files can be scrol-

led through in the normal way.

NOTE

It is only possible to scroll between random CD tracks on the current disc.

3 High Performance and Premium Sound

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 137

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

04

138

Different messages appear depending on

which random function has been selected:

RANDOM means that the tracks from only one music CD are played

RND ALL means that all tracks on all music CDs in the CD changer are played.

RANDOM FOLDER means that the audio files in a directory on the current CD are played.

CD player If a normal music CD is being played, activate/

deactivate under Random.

If a disc with audio files is being played, acti-

vate/deactivate under Random Folder.

CD changer If a normal music CD is being played under

Random Single disc or Random All

discs. The option All discs only applies to the

music CDs in the changer.

If a CD with audio files is being played, activate/

deactivate instead under Random Folder.

If you select another CD the function is deac-

tivated.

Track information If track information is stored on a music CD

then it can be shown on the display. This also

applies to MP3 and WMA files for Premium

Sound and High Performance. Activate/deac-

tivate in CD mode under CD settings Track

information.

Radio functions

G 02

14 04

Centre console, controls for radio functions.

Navigation button for tuning, automatic

Cancel function in progress

Tuning, manual

Scan wavelength

Preset storage, automatic

Preset buttons and preset storage, manual

Select wavelength AM and FM (FM1 and

FM2)

Tuning, automatic 1. Select wavelength using FM or AM.

2. Press / on the navigation button.

Tuning, manual 1. Select wavelength using FM or AM.

2. Turn TUNING.

Preset 10 station presets can be stored per wave-

length. FM has 2 memories for presets: FM1

and FM2. The stored presets are selected

using the preset buttons.

Preset storage can be carried out manually or

automatically.

Preset storage, manual 1. Tune into a station.

2. Hold in a station preset button until the

message Channel stored appears on the

display.

Preset storage, automatic The function is especially useful in areas where

the radio stations and their frequencies are

unfamiliar. The 10 strongest radio stations are

stored automatically in a separate memory.

1. Select wavelength using FM or AM.

2. Hold in AUTO until Autostoring.. appears

on the display.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 138

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

04

139

Once Autostoring.. disappears from the dis-

play, the stations are stored. The radio contin-

ues in Auto mode and Auto appears on the

display. The automatically stored presets can

now be selected using the preset buttons.

Automatic preset storage can be cancelled

using EXIT.

Auto mode is cancelled by pressing for exam-

ple AUTO or FM.

Returning to Auto mode provides access to the

autostored presets:

1. Press AUTO.

> Auto appears on the display.

2. Press a preset button.

Scan wavelength The function automatically searches the cur-

rent wavelength for strong stations. When a

station is found, it is played for approx. 8 sec-

onds before scanning is resumed.

1. Select wavelength using AM or FM.

2. Press SCAN.

SCAN appears on the display. Close using

SCAN or EXIT.

RDS functions RDS (Radio Data System) links FM transmitters

into a network. An FM transmitter in such a

network sends information that gives an RDS

radio the following functions:

Automatically switches to a stronger trans- mitter if reception in the area is poor.

Searches for programme type, such as traffic information or news.

Receives text information on current radio programme.

NOTE

Some radio stations do not use RDS or only some if its functionality.

If a required programme type is located the

radio can switch stations interrupting the audio

source currently in use. For example, if the CD

player is in use, it is paused. The interrupting

transmission is played at a preset volume, see

page 141. The radio returns to the previous

audio source and volume when the set pro-

gramme type is no longer broadcast.

The programme functions alarm (ALARM), traf-

fic information (TP), news (NEWS), and pro-

gramme types(PTY) interrupt one another in

order of priority, where alarm has the highest

priority and programme types has the lowest.

For further programme interruption settings

(EON and REG), see page 140. Press EXIT to

return to the interrupted audio source.

Alarm This function is used to warn of serious acci-

dents and catastrophes. The alarm cannot be

temporarily interrupted or deactivated. The

message ALARM! appears on the display

when an alarm message is transmitted.

Traffic information TP This function allows traffic information sent

within a set station's RDS network to break

through. The TP symbol indicates that the

function is activated. If the set station can send

traffic information then appears on the

display.

Activate/deactivate under FM settings

TP.

TP from current station/all stations The radio can interrupt with traffic information

from only the set (current) station or from all

stations.

Go to FM settings Advanced radio

settings TP TP Station to change.

News This function allows news broadcasts sent

within a set station's RDS network to break

through. The NEWS symbol indicates that the

function is active.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 139

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

04

140

Activate/deactivate under FM settings

News.

News from current/all stations The radio can interrupt with news from only the

set (current) station or from all stations.

Go to FM settings Advanced radio

settings News station to change.

Programme types PTY The PTY function can be used to select differ-

ent programme types, such as pop music and

serious classic. The PTY symbol indicates that

the function is active. This function allows pro-

gramme types broadcast within a set station's

RDS network to break through.

1. Activate in FM mode by selecting a pro-

gramme type under FM settings PTY

Select PTY.

2. Deactivate by clearing the PTYs under FM

settings Clear all PTY.

PTY search This function searches the entire wavelength

for the selected programme type.

1. Select a PTY under FM settings PTY

Select PTY.

2. Go to FM settings PTY Search

PTY.

If the radio finds any of the selected pro-

gramme types, >| To seek appears on the

display.

To continue searching for another broad-

cast of the selected programme types,

press on the navigation button.

Display of programme type The programme type of the current station can

be shown on the display.

Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM

settings PTY Show PTY

NOTE

Not all radio stations support display of pro- gramme type.

Radio text Some RDS stations transmit information on

programme content, artists, etc. This informa-

tion can be shown on the display.

Activate/deactivate in FM mode under

Radio text.

Automatic frequency update AF This function selects one of the strongest

transmitters for a set station. The function may

need to search through the entire FM wave-

length to find a strong transmitter. If this

occurs, the radio mutes and PI Seek Press

Exit to cancel appears on the display.

Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM

settings Advanced radio settings

AF.

Regional radio programmes REG This function causes the radio to continue with

a regional transmitter even if its signal strength

is low. The symbol REG shows that the func-

tion is active.

Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM

settings Advanced radio settings

Regional.

Enhanced Other Networks EON This function is useful in urban areas with many

regional radio stations. It allows the distance

between the car and the radio station trans-

mitter to determine when programme functions

should interrupt the current audio source.

Activate/deactivate in FM mode by select-

ing one of the options under FM settings

Advanced radio settings EON:

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 140

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 141

Local interrupts only if the radio station transmitter is close.

Distant 4 interrupts if the station trans- mitter is far away, even if there is a lot of static.

Off no interruption for programmes from other transmitters.

Resetting RDS functions All radio settings can be reset to the original

factory settings.

The reset is carried out in FM mode under

FM settings Advanced radio settings

Reset all.

Volume control, programme types The interrupting programme types, e.g. NEWS

or TP, are heard at the volume selected for

each respective programme type. If the volume

level is adjusted during the programme inter-

ruption, the new level is saved until the next

programme interruption.

Radio system - DAB*

General DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) is a digital

broadcasting system for radio.

Service and Ensemble

Service - Channel, radio channel (only audio services are supported by the sys- tem).

Ensemble - A collection of radio channels on the same frequency.

Programming of channel groups

(Ensemble learn) When the vehicle is moved to a new broad-

casting area, programming of existing channel

groups in the area can take place.

Programming of channel groups creates an

updated list of all available channel groups.

The list is not updated automatically. Program-

ming takes place via the Ensemble learn menu or directly by means of a long press on

AUTO. If can take up to a minute to program a

channel group if both Band III and LBand are

selected.

Wavelength DAB is transmitted on two wavelengths: Band

III and LBand.

Band III - over the whole country

LBand - mainly in large cities

By selecting for example Band III on its own,

channel programming takes place more

quickly than if both Band III and LBand are

selected. It is not certain that all channel

groups will be found. Wavelength selection

does not affect the stored memories.

Navigation via lists There are three types of basic list which can be

used for navigation:

Ensemble list - Shows channel groups that the receiver has obtained via channel group programming.

Service list - Shows channels irrespective of the channel group to which they are allo- cated. The list can also be filtered using DAB-PTY (see below).

Subchannel list - Subchannels to a selected channel.

The lists can be accessed via the menu. The

channel groups can also be accessed by

pressing ENTER.

Scanning (SCAN) Scanning means that all channels in the list are

played for 10 seconds each.

4 Default/factory settings.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 141

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

04

142

Press SCAN to activate

Scanning can also be selected in DAB-PTY

mode. In which case only the preset type of

channels is played.

Stop scanning by pressing SCAN once, or

by pressing EXIT.

Subchannel Secondary components are usually named

subchannels. These are temporary and can

contain e.g. translations of the main pro-

gramme into other languages.

If one or more subchannels are broadcast then

the > symbol is shown to the right of the chan-

nel name in the display. A subchannel is shown

by means of the > symbol appearing to the left

of the channel name in the display.

To access a subchannel:

Press

To navigate between subchannels:

Press or

Subchannels can only be accessed on the

selected main channel and not on any other

one without selecting it.

DAB PTY (program type) DAB PTY selects one type of radio pro-

gramme. There are 29 different programme

types which also include different programme

categories. After selecting a programme type,

navigation only takes place within the channels

broadcasting that type.

Exit this mode as follows:

Press EXIT

It is also possible to select a preset channel or

exit DAB-PTY via the menu. In certain cases

DAB radio will exit PTY mode when DAB to

DAB linking (see below) is implemented.

DAB to DAB link It is possible to exit a channel with poor or no

reception to the same channel in another chan-

nel group with better reception. There may be

a certain delay when changing channel group.

There may be a short silence between the

availability of the current channel finishing to

the availability of the new channel starting.

DAB display settings 1. Basic - Only the channel name is shown if

a primary component is being played. A

subchannel name is shown if it is a sub-

channel being played

2. Ensemble mode - Adds the channel

group name to the channel name

3. Ensemble + PTY - Adds the programme

type name under the channel name

Presets A preset contains one channel but no sub-

channel. If a subchannel is being played and a

preset is saved then only the channel ID is reg-

istered. This is because subchannels are tem-

porary. At the next attempt to retrieve the

preset, the channel which contained the sub-

channel will be played. The preset is not

dependent on the channel list.

A channel stored as a preset does not need to

be in the channel list to be loaded. If it is loaded

without the channel being available then a pre-

set number is shown and there is silence until

an available preset is selected for loading.

Alternatively another channel.

NOTE

The audio system's DAB system does not support all functions available in the DAB standard.

Menu structure

Main menu DAB

1. Select Ensemble

2. Select channel (Service)

3. Select Subchannel

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 142

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

04

143

4. DAB PTY

4.1. DAB PTY off

4.2. News

4.3. Current affairs

4.4. Information

4.5. Sport

4.6. Education

4.7. Drama

4.8. Art

4.9. Science

4.10. Conversation

4.11. Pop music

4.12 Rock music

4.13. Calm music

4.14. Light classic

4.15. Serious classic

4.16. Other music

4.17. Weather & metro

4.18. Finance

4.19 Children

4.20. Factual

4.21. Religion

4.22. Phone in

4.23. Travel & touring

4.24. Leisure & hobby

4.25. Jazz and blues

4.26. Country music

4.27. National music

4.28. Oldies music

4.29. Folk music

4.30. Documentary

5. Ensemble learn

6. DAB settings

6.1. DAB display settings

6.1.1. Ensemble name

6.1.2. Ensemble name and

PTY

6.1.3. Basic

6.2. DAB to DAB link

6.3. FM traffic

6.4. Select DAB band

6.4.1. Band III

6.4.2. LBand

6.4.3. LBand & Band III

6.5. Reset DAB

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 143

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system - Dual Screen*

04

144 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General

The RSE system can be used at the same time

as the car's infotainment system.

When the rear seat passengers are using DVD,

RSE-AUX or watching TV 1 while listening with

headphones, the driver and front seat passen-

ger can still use the car's radio or CD player.

Power consumption, ignition positions The system can be activated in ignition position

I or II and while the engine is running. When the

car is being started the film stops temporarily

and continues when the engine has started.

When the system has been used once without

the ignition in position I it is blocked. To restart,

ignition position I must be activated.

NOTE

In the event of extended use (more than 10 minutes) with the engine switched off - the capacity of the car's battery may decrease to such a low level that the engine cannot be started.

In which case a message will appear on the screen.

TV overview

Press and select TV I DVD I AUX

TV MEDIA MENU.

Channel list

Channel manage-

ment

Channel search Management of

new carriers

Add carrier

Information on fre-

quency

Delete a frequency

Delete all frequen-

cies

Auto scan

System settings TV

Audio mode

Factory default

Time zone setting

CI module No CAM inserted

CI module infor-

mation

Signal strength

System settings TV

Press MEDIA MENU System settings

TV.

Languages

TV menu language

E.g. English

Pict. format 16:9

4:3

Auto

1 TV is an option for the RSE system.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 144

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system - Dual Screen*

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 145

Mode (screen

mode)

Standard

Zoom

Full screen

Centered

Audio mode Right

Left

Banner timeout

The menus can be

displayed for

between

8-40 seconds.

System settings-Sound mode

Press MEDIA MENU System settings

Audio mode.

The original speech for a TV programme can

be replaced with speech in another language if

the programme is broadcast with several audio

tracks.

Audio Volume - 1, e.g.

ENG.

Volume - 2, e.g.

GER.

Audio mode Right

Left

Stereo

AC3

System settings-Factory settings

Press MEDIA MENU System settings

Factory default.

The system's factory settings are restored

here.

System settings-Time zone settings

Press MEDIA MENU System settings

Time zone setting.

For local programme times to be displayed

correctly the time zone must be set. The

GUIDE and INFO button menus and the clock

are affected by local time zones.

Pay channels To watch pay channels a payment card must

be fitted in an adapter which is inserted into the

digital TV box.

G 03

15 09

The box is located behind the left-hand hatch

in the cargo area

1. Open the hatch in the cargo area, it is

secured with Velcro straps.

> The digital TV box is revealed.

2. Open the rubber cover on the box.

3. Fit the payment card into the adapter.

Make sure that it is fitted correctly.

4. Insert the adapter in the digital TV box.

Make sure that it is inserted correctly.

> The system will detect that it has

received new information.

5. Search to watch the new channels that

have become available, see the section

"Payment card TV channels" below.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 145

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system - Dual Screen*

04

146 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Payment card TV channels Search so that the system identifies the pay-

ment card's channels.

1. Press MEDIA MENU on the remote con-

trol.

2. Select Channel search Auto scan.

3. Select country and press .

Formats supported by the digital TV box The TV system supports MPEG-2 transmis-

sions. There is the option to receive

MPEG-4 transmissions if you buy an adapter.

This adapter is inserted into the digital TV box

and is fitted in the same way as the adapter for

the payment card. See the section "Pay chan-

nels" above.

Music

Playing back a CD disc 1. Insert the CD with the label side turned

from the buttons.

> The disc starts to play back automati-

cally.

2. Switch on the wireless headphones, select

CH A for left-hand screen or CH B for right-

hand screen.

> The sound is directed to the head-

phones.

3. Adjust the audio volume in the headphones

using the volume control/wheel on the

headphones.

Alternatively - activate the car's audio sys-

tem in MODE-AUX and press A B on

the remote control to listen via the speak-

ers.

Selecting within a disc directory 1. Load the disc.

2. Press .

3. Scroll using the navigation buttons to

select a file.

4. Press to select the subdirectory.

Different playback options The disc can be played back in different ways,

scroll with the navigation buttons to select

playback option.

When the dialogue box appears:

1. Press the right-hand navigation button to

move over in the right-hand menu.

2. Scroll using the navigation buttons to

select playback options.

3. Confirm with .

Change CD track

Change CD track with or

fast-wind by holding the buttons

depressed.

Pause 1.

Pause and restart the disc with .

2. Stop the disc with .

3. Press again to eject the disc.

Discs copied privately can be used. However, playback and quality depend on the

quality of the source file, format and disc qual-

ity.

AUX input, Electrical socket 12 V

The input allows you to connect other equip-

ment. Always follow the instructions included

with the external equipment, or from the man-

ufacturer or reseller, when connecting. Equip-

ment connected via the RSE AUX input can use

the screens, wireless headphones, head-

phones sockets and the car's speakers.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 146

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system - Dual Screen*

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 147

Connecting the RSE AUX input

G 03

03 82

The RSE-AUX input is located under the front arm- rest.

1. Connect the video cable to the yellow

socket.

2. Connect the left-hand audio cable to the

white socket and the right-hand one to the

red socket.

3. Connect the power cable to the power

socket if your equipment is designed for

12 V.

For electrical socket location, see page 184

System

Formats supported by the system.

Audio

format

CD-DA, DVD Audio Playback,

MP3, WMA

Video

format

DVD video, VCD, SVCD, DivX/

MPEG-4, WMA video, Photo CD

Kodak, Photo CD JPG

Disc

format

DVD-RAM, DVD-ROM, DVD-RW,

DVD+RW, DVD-R, DVD+R, CD-R,

CD-ROM, CD-RW, CD-3, HDCD

Advanced system settings These settings can only be accessed when the

DVD player is empty.

Press MEDIA MENU.

GENERAL SETUP ANGLE MARK

CAPTION

AUDIO SETUP COMPRESSION

DVX(R)

REGISTRATION

PREFERENCES TV TYPE

AUDIO

SUBTITLE

DEFAULTS

Changing the battery in the remote control and wireless headphones

The remote control and headphones are pow-

ered by 2 AAA batteries.

Take along extra batteries for a long journey.

G 03

13 61

1. Unscrew the screw and detach the battery

cover.

2. Remove the used batteries, turn the new

batteries in accordance with the symbols

in the battery compartment and insert

them.

3. Fit the cover and screw in the screw.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 147

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system - Dual Screen*

04

148 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

G 03

13 58

1. Unscrew the screw and detach the battery

cover.

2. Remove the used batteries, turn the new

batteries in accordance with the symbols

in the battery compartment and insert

them.

3. Fit the cover and screw in the screw.

NOTE

If the system is too hot to be used or if bat- tery voltage is too low then an information message appears on the screen.

Environmental care Be sure to dispose of the exhausted batteries

in an environmentally responsible manner.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 148

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Trip computer

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 149

General

G 02

13 64

Information display and controls.

READ - confirms

Thumbwheel browse between menus

and options in the trip computer list

RESET resets

To scroll through trip computer information,

turn the thumbwheel up or down in steps. Con-

tinue turning to return to the starting point.

Functions

NOTE

If a warning message appears while you are using the trip computer, this message must be acknowledged in order to revert to the trip computer function. Acknowledge by pressing READ.

To change unit specified for distance and

speed, contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

Current speed* The instrument panel display shows current

speed in mph if the speedometer is graduated

in km/h. If the speedometer is graduated in

mph then the current speed is shown in km/h.

Average speed The car calculates the average speed from the

last resetting. Reset using RESET.

Instantaneous Current fuel consumption is calculated every

second. The information on the display is

updated every couple of seconds. When the

car is stationary, " ----" appears on the display.

Average The average fuel consumption since the last

reset. Reset using RESET.

NOTE

There may be a slight error in the reading if a fuel-driven additional 1, and/or parking heater* has been used.

Km to empty tank The calculation is based on the average fuel

consumption over the last 30 km and the

remaining driveable fuel quantity. The display

shows the approximate distance that can be

driven with the fuel quantity remaining in the

tank. No guaranteed range remains when the

display shows " --- km to empty tank". Refuel

as soon as possible.

NOTE

There may be a slight error in the reading if a fuel-driven parking heater* has been used or if driving style has been changed.

Resetting 1. Select Average speed or Average.

2. Press and hold RESET for

approx. 1 second to reset the selected

1 Diesel cars only.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 149

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Trip computer

04

150

function. If RESET is kept depressed for at

least 3 three seconds then Average speed

and Average are reset simultaneously.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 150

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Compass*

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 151

Operation

G 02

97 37

Rearview mirror with compass.

The bottom centre of the rearview mirror has

an integrated display that shows the compass

direction in which the front of the car is point-

ing. Eight different directions are shown with

English abbreviations: N (north), NE (north

east), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW

(south west), W (west) and NW (north west).

The compass is activated automatically when

the car is started or in key position II, see

page 70. To deactivate/activate the compass -

press in the button on the rear side of the mirror

using a paper clip for example.

Calibration The compass may need calibrating to work

correctly. C is shown in the mirror's display if

the compass needs calibrating.

1. Stop the car in a large open area free from

steel structures and high-voltage power

lines.

2. Start the car.

NOTE

For optimum calibration - switch off all elec- trical equipment (climate control system, wipers etc.) and make sure that all doors are closed.

3. Press and hold the button on the rear of the

rearview mirror (use a paper clip or similar)

until C is shown again (approx. 6 seconds).

4. Drive off as usual. C disappears from the

display when calibration is complete.

Alternative calibration method: Drive

slowly in a circle at a speed of no more than

8 km/h until C disappears from the display

when calibration is complete.

Selecting the zone

G 03

02 95

Magnetic zones.

The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.

The correct zone must be selected for the com-

pass to work correctly.

1. The remote control key should be in posi-

tion II, see page 70.

2. Press and hold the button on the rear of the

rearview mirror (use a paper clip or similar)

for at least 3 seconds. The number for the

current area is shown.

3. Press the button repeatedly until the num-

ber for the required geographic area ( 1

15) is shown.

4. The display will revert to showing the com-

pass direction after a few seconds.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 151

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

DSTC Stability and traction control system

04

152

General information on DSTC

The stability and traction control system, DSTC

(Dynamic Stability and Traction Control) helps

the driver to avoid skidding and improves the

car's traction.

The system limits the driving and brake force

of the wheels individually so that skidding can

be avoided. This increases manoeuvrability

and as a result safety in the event of sudden

movement.

Traction is improved by means of the system

distributing the driving force between the

wheels. The system primarily engages at low

speed on poor road surfaces.

The activation of the system during braking

may be noticed as a throbbing sound. The car

may accelerate slower than expected when the

accelerator pedal is depressed.

Messages in the information display

DSTC Temporarily OFF System temporarily reduced due to excessive

brake disc temperature. The function is reacti-

vated automatically when the brakes have

cooled.

DSTC Service required System disabled due to a fault.

Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the

engine. If the message remains when the

engine is restarted, drive to an authorised

Volvo workshop.

Symbols in the combined instrument

panel

If the symbols and are displayed

at the same time, read the message on the

information display.

If the symbol appears alone then it may

appear as follows:

Flashing light means that the system is now being activated.

Constant glow for 2 seconds means sys- tem check when the engine is started.

Constant glow after starting the engine or while driving means system fault.

Reduced operation System operation during skidding and accel-

eration can be reduced. Operation during skid-

ding is delayed and so allows more skidding

which provides greater freedom for dynamic

driving. Traction in deep snow or sand is

improved as traction is no longer limited.

Operation

G 02

14 09

1. Turn the thumbwheel until the DSTC

menu is shown. DSTC ON means that the

system function is unchanged.

DSTC spin control OFF means that sys-

tem operation is reduced.

2. Press and hold RESET until the DSTC

menu is changed.

The system remains reduced until the engine is

next started.

WARNING

The car's driving characteristics may dete- riorate if the function is reduced.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 152

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adapting driving characteristics

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 153

Active chassis (Four C)*

Active chassis, Four-C (Continuously Con-

trolled Chassis Concept), regulates the cha-

racteristics of the shock absorbers so that the

car's driving characteristics can be adjusted.

There are three settings: Comfort, Sport and

Advanced.

Comfort This setting means that the car is perceived as

being more comfortable and is recommended

for longer journeys. Shock absorption is soft

and the movement of the body is smooth and

gentle.

Sport This setting means that the car is perceived as

being more sporty and is recommended for

more active driving. Steering response is faster

than in the Comfort mode. Shock absorption is

harder and the body follows the road in order

to reduce rolling during fast cornering.

Advanced This setting is only recommended on very even

and smooth road surfaces.

The shock absorbers are optimised for maxi-

mum roadholding and rolling in bends is further

minimised.

Operation

G 02

14 10

Chassis settings.

Use the buttons in the centre console to

change setting. The setting in use when the

engine is switched off is activated next time the

engine is started.

Speed related steering force*

Steering force increases with the speed of the

car to give the driver enhanced sensitivity. At

low speed the car is easy to steer in order to

facilitate parking for example.

Steering force can be changed under Car

settings Steering force level For a

description of the menu system, see

page 116

This menu cannot be accessed while the car is

in motion.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 153

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Cruise control*

04

154 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Operation

G 02

14 11

Display and controls.

Standby mode

Resume set speed

Deactivating

Activate/set speed

Set speed (in brackets = standby mode)

Activating and setting the speed In order to enable the activation of cruise con-

trol, it must first be engaged in standby mode

with the CRUISE button . The symbol

illuminates in the display and the text (---) km/

h shows that cruise control is in standby

mode.

Cruise control is then activated with or

after which the current speed is stored and is

used as the set speed. The display text (---)

km/h changes to show the set speed, e.g.

100 km/h.,

NOTE

Cruise control cannot be engaged at speeds below 30 km/h.

Adjusting the set speed In active mode the speed is adjusted with long

or short presses on or .

A temporary increase in speed using the accel-

erator, such as while overtaking, does not

affect the cruise control setting. When the

accelerator is released the car will return to the

set speed.

NOTE

If one of the cruise control buttons is kept depressed for more than approx. one minute then cruise control is disengaged. The engine must then be switched off in order to then reset cruise control.

Deactivation Cruise control is disengaged with CRUISE or

by switching off the engine. The set speed is

cleared.

Temporary deactivation

Press On to disengage cruise control tem-

porarily. The saved speed is shown in brackets

in the display, e.g. (100) km/h.

Automatic temporary deactivation Cruise control is deactivated spontaneously

when the driving wheels spin or if the car's

speed falls below approx. ca 30 km/h. Cruise

control is also deactivated when the brakes are

used, when the gear selector is moved to neu-

tral position or if the accelerator pedal is

depressed for a longer time (approx. 60 sec-

onds). Cruise control then changes over to

standby mode and the set speed is saved.

Resume set speed If cruise control has been deactivated tempo-

rarily, it can be reactivated by pressing . The

speed is then set to the previously set speed.

NOTE

A significant increase in speed may arise

after the speed has been resumed with .

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 154

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive cruise control*

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 155

General

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is designed to

assist the driver with support on long straight

roads in steady traffic, for example on motor-

ways and main roads.

WARNING

You must always pay attention to the traffic conditions and intervene when adaptive cruise control is not maintaining a suitable speed or suitable distance.

Adaptive cruise control cannot cover all driving situations and traffic, weather and road conditions.

The Function section and after informs about limitations that the driver must be aware of before using the adaptive cruise control.

When driving you are responsible for main- taining the correct distance and speed, even when adaptive cruise control is used.

IMPORTANT

Maintenance of adaptive cruise control components must only be performed by an authorised Volvo workshop.

Function

G 02

14 12

Functions overview.

Warning lamp, braking by driver required

Controls

Radar sensor

Adaptive cruise control consists of a cruise

control system and a coordinated spacing sys-

tem.

WARNING

Adaptive cruise control is not a collision avoidance system. The driver must inter- vene if the system does not detect a vehicle in front.

Adaptive cruise control does not brake for people or animals. Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles and objects.

Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/ snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on slip roads.

The distance to the vehicle ahead is measured

by a radar sensor. The speed is regulated by

acceleration and braking. It is normal for the

brakes to emit a low sound when they are being

used by cruise control.

WARNING

The brake pedal moves when the cruise control brakes. Do not rest your foot under the brake pedal as it could become trapped.

The cruise control objective is to follow the

vehicle ahead but in the same lane and at a set

time interval. If the radar sensor has not

detected a vehicle ahead then the only objec-

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 155

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive cruise control*

04

156 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

tive is the set speed. This is also the case if the

speed of the vehicle ahead exceeds the cruise

control set speed.

The adaptive cruise control aims to control the

speed in a smooth way. In situations that

demand sudden braking you must brake your-

self. This applies with large differences in

speed, or if the vehicle in front brakes heavily.

Due to limitations in the radar sensor, braking

may come unexpectedly or not at all, see

page 158.

Adaptive cruise control can only be activated

above 30 km/h. If speed falls below 30 km/h or

if engine speed becomes too slow, then the

adaptive cruise control disengages and stops

braking. In which case the driver must imme-

diately take over and maintain the distance to

vehicles in front. The highest speed setting is

200 km/h.

Warning lamp, braking by driver required Adaptive cruise control has a braking capacity

that is equivalent to approximately 30% of the

car's braking capacity.

If the car needs to brake more heavily than

cruise control capacity and the driver does not

brake, then the cruise control uses the collision

warning system's warning lamp and warning

sound to alert the driver that immediate inter-

vention is required.

NOTE

The warning lamp may be difficult to notice in strong sunlight or when sunglasses are being worn.

WARNING

Cruise control only warns of vehicles detected by the radar sensor. Consequently there may be no warning or it may be sub- ject to a delay. Do not wait for a warning but brake when it is necessary.

Operation

G 01

73 50

Display and controls.

Activate and resume settings, increase

speed

Standby mode, on/off

Set time interval

Activating and setting the speed

Set speed (in brackets = standby mode)

Set time interval during adjustment

Set time interval after adjustment

Activating and setting the speed In order to enable the activation of cruise con-

trol, it must first be engaged in standby mode

with the button . The symbol illuminates

in the display and the characters (---) show

that cruise control is in standby mode.

Cruise control is then activated with or ,

after which the current speed is stored and is

used as the set speed. The display characters

(---) change to show the set speed, e.g. 100.

The car symbol is illuminated

on the left-hand side of the

display when the radar sensor

has detected another vehicle.

The distance to vehicles in

front is only regulated when

the symbol is illuminated.

NOTE

Cruise control cannot be engaged at speeds below 30 km/h.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 156

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive cruise control*

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 157

Adjusting the set speed In active mode the speed is adjusted with long

or short presses on , or . In active

mode the button has the same function as

but results in a lower increase in speed.

NOTE

If one of the cruise control buttons is kept depressed for more than approx. one minute then cruise control is disengaged. The engine must then be switched off in order to then reset cruise control.

In some situations cruise control cannot be activated. In which case Cruise control Unavailable is shown in the display, see page 159.

Set time interval The set time interval to vehicles in front is

increased with and decreased with .

Five different time intervals

can be chosen from and

shown in the display as 15

horizontal lines the more

lines there are the longer the

time interval, see page 161

for table.

At low speed, when the distances are short, the

adaptive cruise control increases the time

interval slightly.

The adaptive cruise control allows the time

interval to vary noticeably in certain situations

in order to allow the car to follow the vehicle in

front smoothly and comfortably.

Note that a short time interval only allows the

driver a short reaction time if any unforeseen

traffic problem should arise.

The number of lines for the

selected time interval is

shown during the setting itself

and for several seconds after-

wards. Then a smaller scale

version of the symbol is

shown to the right of the dis-

play. The same symbol is also shown when

Distance Alert is activated, see page 161.

NOTE

Only use the time interval that is allowed in accordance with local traffic regulations.

If cruise control does not seem to react to activation the reason may be that the time interval to the closest vehicle prevents an increase in speed.

The higher the speed, the longer the calcu- lated distance in metres for a specific time interval.

Deactivating and resuming settings Cruise control is deactivated, either with a

short press on , or by means of driver inter-

vention, e.g. braking. The set speed is then

shown in brackets, e.g. ( 100). Speed and time

interval are resumed with one press on .

For each additional press on , when cruise

control is activated, the set speed increases in

stages of 1 km/h.

NOTE

A significant increase in speed may arise

after the speed has been resumed with .

A short press on in standby mode or a long

press in active mode deactivates cruise con-

trol. The set speed is cleared and cannot be

resumed.

Deactivation due to driver intervention Cruise control is deactivated when the brakes

are used, the gear selector is moved to neutral

position, or if the accelerator pedal is

depressed for a longer period. Cruise control

then changes over to standby mode and the

driver must regulate vehicle speed manually.

If the accelerator pedal is kept depressed for a

shorter period, for example during overtaking,

cruise control is temporarily disengaged and

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 157

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive cruise control*

04

158 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

then re-engaged when the accelerator pedal is

released.

Automatic deactivation Adaptive cruise control is dependent on other

systems e.g. stability and traction control sys-

tem (DSTC). If any of these systems stop work-

ing then cruise control is automatically deacti-

vated.

In the event of automatic deactivation a signal

will sound and the message Cruise control

Cancelled is shown in the display. The driver

must then intervene and adapt the speed to

vehicles in front.

An automatic deactivation can be due to:

speed falls below 30 km/h

wheels lose traction

brake temperature is high

engine speed is too low

the radar sensor is covered e.g. by wet snow or heavy rain (radar waves blocked).

The radar sensor and its limitations

Apart from the adaptive cruise control, the

radar sensor is also used by the Collision

Warning with Auto Brake function (see

page 164) and the Distance Alert function (see

page 161). It is designed to detect cars or

larger vehicles driving in the same direction.

Modification of the radar sensor could result in

it being illegal to use.

WARNING

Accessories or other objects such as auxil- iary lamps must not be installed in front of the grille.

The capacity of the radar sensor to detect vehi-

cles in front is reduced significantly:

if the radar sensor becomes blocked and cannot detect other vehicles e.g. in heavy rain or slush, or if other objects have col- lected in front of the radar sensor.

NOTE

Keep the surface in front of the radar sensor clean.

if the speed of vehicles in front is signifi- cantly different from your own speed.

The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In

some situations it may detect another vehicle

later than expected or not detect any vehicle at

all.

G 02

14 14

Radar sensor field of vision (grey).

Sometimes the radar sensor cannot detect

vehicles at close quarters, for example a

vehicle that drives in between your car and

vehicles in front.

Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or

vehicles not driving in the centre of the lane

can remain undetected.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 158

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive cruise control*

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 159

In bends the radar sensor may detect the

wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle

from view.

Fault tracing and action If the display shows the message Radar

blocked See manual this means that the

radar signals from the radar sensor are blocked

and that vehicles in front of the car could not

be detected.

In turn this means that the Adaptive Cruise

Control, Distance Alert and Collision Warning

with Auto Brake functions are not operating

either.

The table presents possible causes for a mes-

sage being shown along with the appropriate

action.

Cause Action

The radar surface in the grille is dirty or covered with ice or snow. Clean the radar surface in the grille from dirt, ice and snow.

Heavy rain or snow blocking the radar signals. No action. Sometimes the radar does not work during heavy rain or

snowfall.

Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar sig-

nals.

No action. Sometimes the radar does not work on a very wet or snowy

road surface.

The radar surface has been cleaned but the message remains. Wait. It could take several minutes for the radar to sense that it is no

longer blocked.

Symbols and messages in the display

Symbol Message Specification

Standby mode or active mode without detected vehicle.

Active mode with detected vehicle to which cruise control adapts the speed.

Set time interval, during adjustment.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 159

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive cruise control*

04

160 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Symbol Message Specification

Set time interval, after adjustment.

Turn on DSTC to enable

Cruise

Cruise control cannot be activated until the traction control and stability function (DSTC) has been

activated.

Cruise control Cancelled The cruise control has been shut down.

The driver must regulate the speed.

Cruise control Unavailable Cruise control cannot be activated.

This could be due to:

brake temperature is high

the radar sensor is blocked e.g. by wet snow or rain.

Radar blocked See manual Cruise control temporarily disengaged.

The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles, e.g. in the event that heavy rain or slush

has collected in front of the radar sensor.

Read about the limitations of the radar sensor, see page 158.

Cruise control Service

required

Cruise control not working.

Contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 160

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Distance Alert

04

161

General

Distance Alert is a function that indicates the

time interval to vehicles in front.

The distance information is only provided for

vehicles driving in front of the car and in the

same direction. No distance information is pro-

vided for oncoming, slow or stationary vehi-

cles.

G 01

73 62

A small section of the red warning lamp in the

windscreen illuminates with a constant glow

when driving closer than the set time interval to

vehicles in front.

NOTE

Distance Alert is deactivated during the time that Adaptive Cruise Control is active.

Distance Alert is active at speeds above

30 km/h.

WARNING

Distance Alert only shows the distance to vehicles in front the speed of the car is not affected.

Operation

G 01

73 71

Press the button in the centre console to switch

the function on or off. The function is switched

on if one lamp is illuminated in the button.

Set time interval The buttons for setting the time interval to vehi-

cles in front are located to the left in the steer-

ing wheel. Time intervals are increased using

and decreased using .

Five different time intervals

can be chosen from and

shown in the display as 15

horizontal lines the more

lines there are the longer the

time interval.

Number of lines Time interval (seconds)

1 1.0

2 1.4

3 1.8

4 2.2

5 2.6

The number of lines for the

selected time interval is

shown during the setting itself

and for several seconds after-

wards. Then a smaller scale

version of the symbol is

shown to the right of the dis-

play. The same symbol is also shown when

adaptive cruise control is activated.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 161

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Distance Alert

04

162

NOTE

The higher the speed, the longer the calcu- lated distance in metres for a specific time interval.

The set time interval is also used by the adaptive cruise control function, see page 156.

Only use the time interval that is allowed in accordance with local traffic regulations.

Limitations

The function uses the same radar sensor as

adaptive cruise control and the collision warn-

ing system. For more information on the radar

sensor and its limitations, see page 158.

NOTE

Strong sunlight, reflections or strong varia- tions in light intensity, as well as wearing sunglasses, could mean that the warning light in the windscreen cannot be seen.

Poor weather or winding roads could affect the

radar sensor's capacity to detect vehicles in

front. The size of other vehicles could also

affect detection capacity, e.g. motorcycles.

This could mean that the warning lamp illumi-

nates at a shorter distance than the setting or

that the warning is temporarily absent. In which

case, select a shorter time interval or switch off

the function temporarily.

Symbols and messages in the display

Symbol Message Specification

Set time interval, during adjustment.

Set time interval, after adjustment.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 162

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Distance Alert

04

163

Symbol Message Specification

Radar blocked. See man-

ual

Distance Alert temporarily disengaged.

The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles, e.g. in the event that heavy rain or slush

has collected in front of the radar sensor.

Collision warn. Service

required

Distance Alert or Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 163

henrikrosenqvist

Read about the limitations of the radar sensor see page 158.

Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if the message remains.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision Warning with Auto Brake*

04

164 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General

Collision Warning with Auto Brake is designed

to assist the driver when there is a risk of col-

liding with a vehicle in front that is stationary or

driving in the same direction.

The collision warning system has the following

three functions.

1. Collision warning Warns the driver of a potentially imminent col-

lision.

2. Brake support Assists the driver to brake effectively in a criti-

cal situation.

3. Auto Brake Brakes the car automatically when a collision

is unavoidable. The Auto Brake function can-

not prevent a collision but instead aims to

reduce collision speed.

IMPORTANT

Maintenance of collision warning system components must only be performed by an authorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING

The collision warning system does not work in all driving situations and traffic, weather and road conditions. The collision warning system does not react to vehicles driving in another direction to the car or to people and animals.

Warning only activated in the event of a high risk for collision. The Function section and the section after advise about limitations of which the driver should be aware before using Collision Warning with Auto Brake.

The Auto Brake function can only reduce the collision speed. The driver must depress the brake pedal to achieve full brake function.

Never wait for a collision warning. When driving you are responsible for maintaining the correct distance and speed, even when the collision warning system is used.

Function

G 01

73 82

Functions overview.

Visual warning signal in the event of a col-

lision risk

Radar sensor

Camera sensor

Collision warning Together with a camera sensor, the radar sen-

sor detects stationary vehicles as well as vehi-

cles driving in the same direction in front of the

car. In the event of there being a risk of collision

with such a vehicle your attention is drawn with

a red flashing warning lamp and a warning

sound.

The collision warning system is active from and

including 7 km/h.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 164

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision Warning with Auto Brake*

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 165

Brake support If the risk of collision still increases after the

collision warning then the brake support is acti-

vated. The brake support prepares the brake

system for rapid braking and the brakes are

applied gently, which may be noticed as a

slight jerk.

If the brake pedal is depressed sufficiently

quickly then full brake function is implemented,

even with light pedal force.

Auto Brake If the driver has not yet started an evasive

manoeuvre in this situation and the risk of a

collision is imminent then the Auto Brake func-

tion comes into effect, without the driver need-

ing to touch the brake pedal. Braking then

takes place with limited brake force in order to

reduce collision speed. The driver has to brake

in order to achieve full brake force.

Operation

Settings are made from the centre console dis-

play via a menu system. For information on

how the menu system is used, see page 116.

NOTE

The Auto Brake function is always switched on and cannot be switched off.

On and Off To select whether the collision warning system

should be switched on or off: Under the Car

settings Collision warning settings menu,

select between the options for On or Off. The

setting selected when the engine was switched

off is automatically obtained when the engine

is started.

Activating/deactivating warning signals The warning sound and warning lamp are acti-

vated automatically when the engine is started

if the system is switched on.

The warning sound can be activated/deacti-

vated separately using the options for On or

Off under Car settings Collision warning

settings Warning sound.

Set warning distance The warning distance regulates the distance at

which the visual and acoustic warnings are

deployed. Select one of the options from

Long, Normal or Short under Car settings

Collision warning settings Warning

distance.

The warning distance determines the system's

sensitivity. Warning distance Long provides an

earlier warning. First test with Long and if this

setting produces too many warnings, which

could be perceived as irritating in certain sit-

uations, then change to warning distance

Normal.

Only use warning distance Short in excep-

tional cases, e.g. for dynamic driving.

NOTE

When the adaptive cruise control is in use the warning lamp and warning sound will be used by the cruise control even if the colli- sion warning system is switched off.

The collision warning system warns the driver in the event of a risk of a collision, but the function cannot shorten driver reaction time.

In order for the collision warning system to be effective, always drive with the Distance Alert set at time interval 4 5. see page 161.

NOTE

Even if the warning distance has been set to Long then in certain situations warnings could be perceived as being late. E.g. in the event of large differences in speed or if vehi- cles in front brake heavily.

Checking settings The settings required can be controlled on the

centre console display. Access via the menu

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 165

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision Warning with Auto Brake*

04

166 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

for Car settings Collision warning

settings, see page 116.

Limitations

The visual warning signal may be difficult to

notice in the event of strong sunlight, reflec-

tions, when sunglasses are being worn or if the

driver is not looking straight ahead. The warn-

ing sound should therefore always be acti-

vated.

NOTE

The visual warning signal can be temporarily disengaged in the event of high passenger compartment temperature caused by strong sunlight for example. If this occurs then the warning sound is activated even if it is deactivated in the menu system.

Warnings may not appear if the dis- tance to the vehicle in front is small or if steering wheel and pedal movements are large, e.g. a very active driving style.

WARNING

Warnings and braking action could be implemented late or not at all if the traffic situation or external influences mean that the radar or camera sensor cannot detect a vehicle in front correctly.

The sensor system has a limited range for stationary or slow vehicles so the system provides less effective warnings or no warn- ings at all at a higher vehicle speed (above 70 km/h) for such vehicles.

Warnings for stationary or slow vehicles could be disengaged due to darkness.

The collision warning system uses the same

radar sensors as adaptive cruise control. For

more information on the radar sensor and its

limitations, see page 158.

An absent or late warning could mean that

there is no brake support or it comes late.

If warnings are perceived as being too frequent

or disturbing then the warning distance can be

reduced. This would lead to the system warn-

ing at a later stage, which reduces the total

number of warnings.

Camera sensor limitations The car's camera sensor is used by the three

functions - Collision Warning with Auto Brake,

Driver Alert Control, see page 169 and Lane

Departure Warning, see page 172.

NOTE

Keep the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor clean from ice, snow, mist and dirt.

Do not attach or fit anything to the wind- screen in front of the camera sensor, as this could reduce or prevent the function of one or more camera-dependent systems.

The camera sensors have limitations similar to

the human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in dark-

ness, heavy snowfall or rain and in thick fog for

example. Under such conditions the functions

of camera-dependent systems could be sig-

nificantly reduced or temporarily disengaged.

Strong oncoming light, reflections in the car-

riageway, snow or ice on the road surface, dirty

road surfaces or unclear lane markings could

also significantly reduce a camera sensor func-

tion. Functions such as scanning the carriage-

way and detecting other vehicles for example.

During very high temperatures the camera is

temporarily switched off for about 15 minutes

after the engine is started in order to protect

camera functionality.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 166

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision Warning with Auto Brake*

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 167

Fault tracing and action If the display shows the message Windscreen

Sensors blocked then this means that the

camera sensor is blocked and cannot detect

vehicles or road markings in front of the car.

In turn this means that the Collision Warning

with Auto Brake, Lane Departure Warning and

Driver Alert Control functions are not operating

with full functionality.

The table presents possible causes for a mes-

sage being shown along with the appropriate

action.

Cause Action

The windscreen sur-

face in front of the

camera is dirty or

covered with ice or

snow.

Clean the wind-

screen surface in

front of the camera

from dirt, ice and

snow.

Thick fog, heavy rain

or snow means that

the camera does not

work sufficiently

well.

No action. At times

the camera does not

work during heavy

rain or snowfall.

Cause Action

The windscreen sur-

face in front of the

camera has been

cleaned but the

message remains.

Wait. It may take

several minutes for

the camera to meas-

ure the visibility.

Dirt has appeared

between the inside

of the windscreen

and the camera.

Contact an author-

ised Volvo work-

shop to have the

windscreen inside

the camera cover

cleaned.

Symbols and messages in the display

Symbol Message Specification

Collis'n warning OFF Collision warning system switched off.

Shown when the engine is started.

The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the READ button.

Collision warn. Unavailable The collision warning system cannot be activated.

Shown when the driver attempts to activate the function.

The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the READ button.

Auto braking was acti-

vated

Auto Brake has been active.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 167

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision Warning with Auto Brake*

04

168 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Symbol Message Specification

Windscreen Sensors

blocked

The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.

Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.

Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.

Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 166.

Radar blocked. See man-

ual

Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily disengaged.

The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles, e.g. in the event that heavy rain or slush

has collected in front of the radar sensor.

Collision warn. Service

required

Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged.

Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if the message remains.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 168

henrikrosenqvist

Read about the limitations of the radar sensor see page 158.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System DAC*

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 169

Introduction

The Driver Alert System is intended to assist

drivers whose driving ability is deteriorating or

who are inadvertently leaving the lane they are

driving on.

The Driver Alert System consists of two differ-

ent functions, which can either be switched on

at the same time or individually:

Driver Alert Control (DAC)

Lane Departure Warning (LDW), see page 172.

A switched-on function is set in standby mode

and is not activated automatically until speed

exceeds 65 km/h.

The function is deactivated again when speed

decreases to below 60 km/h.

Both functions use a camera which is depend-

ent on the lane having side markings painted

on each side.

WARNING

The Driver Alert System does not work in all situations but is instead only intended to be of supplementary assistance.

The driver always has ultimate responsibility that the car is driven safely.

General information on Driver Alert Control - DAC

G 01

73 32

The function is intended to attract the driver's

attention when he/she starts to drive less con-

sistently, e.g. if he/she becomes distracted or

starts to fall asleep.

A camera detects the side markings painted on

the carriageway and compares the section of

the road with the driver's steering wheel move-

ments. The driver is alerted if the vehicle does

not follow the carriageway evenly.

NOTE

The camera sensor has certain limitations, see page 166.

The objective for DAC is to detect slowly dete-

riorating driving ability and it is primarily

intended for major roads. The function is not

intended for city traffic.

In some cases driving ability is not affected

despite driver fatigue. In which case there may

not be any warning issued for the driver. For

this reason it is always important to stop and

take a break in the event of any signs of driver

fatigue, irrespective of whether or not DAC

issues a warning.

NOTE

The function must not be used to extend a driving stint. Always plan breaks at regular intervals and ensure that you are fully rested.

Limitation In some cases the system may issue a warning

despite driving ability not deteriorating, for

example:

if the driver tests the LDW function.

in strong side winds.

on rutted road surfaces.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 169

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System DAC*

04

170 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Operation

Some settings are made from the centre con-

sole display and its menu system. For informa-

tion on how the menu system is used, see

page 116.

The current status can be checked on the trip

computer display with the left-hand stalk

switch.

G 01

73 29

Thumbwheel. Turn the rotary control until

the display shows Driver Alert. The sec-

ond row displays the Off, Unavailable or

Level mark options.

READ button. Confirms or clears a warning

in the memory.

Activating Driver Alert Control Using the centre console display with its menu

system, locate Car settings Driver Alert.

Select the On option.

The function is activated when speed

exceeds 65 km/h and it remains

active as long as the speed exceeds

60 km/h. The display shows a level

mark with 1-5 bars, where a low number of bars

indicates inconsistent driving ability. A high

number of bars indicates stable driving.

If the vehicle is driven inconsistently then the

driver is alerted by an acoustic signal as well as

the text message Driver Alert Time for a

break. The warning is repeated after a time if

driving ability does not improve.

WARNING

An alarm should be taken most seriously as a sleepy driver is not usually aware of his/ her condition.

In the event of an alarm or signs of driver fatigue; stop the car in a safe manner as soon as possible and rest.

Studies have shown that it is equally as dan- gerous to drive when tired as it is under the influence of alcohol.

Symbols and messages in the display

Symbol Message Specification

Driver Alert OFF Function not switched on.

Driver Alert Unavailable Speed is lower than 60 km/h, the carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor

is temporarily disengaged. Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 166.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 170

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System DAC*

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 171

Symbol Message Specification

Driver Alert The function analyses the driver's driving style.

The number of bars can vary in the range 1-5, where a low number of bars indicates inconsistent

driving ability. A high number of bars indicates stable driving.

Driver Alert Time for a

break

The vehicle has been driven inconsistently; the driver is alerted by an acoustic warning signal + text.

Windscreen Sensors

blocked

The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.

Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.

Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.

Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 166.

Driver Alert Sys Service

required

The system is disengaged.

Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if the message remains.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 171

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System - LDW*

04

172 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General information on Lane Departure Warning - LDW

G 01

73 94

The function is intended to reduce the risk for

single-vehicle accidents accidents where, in

certain situations, the vehicle leaves the car-

riageway and is in danger of driving either into

a ditch or into oncoming traffic.

LDW consists of a camera that detects the side

markings painted on the carriageway. The

driver is alerted by an acoustic signal if the

vehicle crosses a side marking.

Operation and function

G 01

74 26

The function is switched on or off by means of

a switch on the centre console. An indicator

lamp in the button illuminates when the func-

tion is switched on.

The trip computer display shows Lane Depart

Warn Unavailable when the function is in

standby mode.

The LDW function is activated automatically

from standby mode after the camera has scan-

ned in the carriageway's side markings and

speed exceeds 65 km/h. The trip computer

display then shows Lane Depart Warn

Available.

If the camera can no longer detect the carria-

geway's side markings or if speed decreases

to below 60 km/h then the function resumes

standby mode and the display shows Lane

Depart Warn Unavailable.

If the vehicle crosses the left or right-hand side

marking of the carriageway without due cause

then the driver is alerted by an acoustic signal.

No warning is given in the following situations:

Direction indicators activated

The driver has his/her foot on the brake

pedal1

In the event of the accelerator pedal being

depressed rapidly1

In the event of rapid steering wheel move-

ments1

In the event of a sudden turn so that the car rolls.

The camera sensor also has certain limitations.

For more information, see page 166.

NOTE

The driver is only warned once each time the wheels cross a line. So there is no acoustic alarm when there is a line between the car's wheels.

1 A warning is still given when Increased sensitivity is selected, see Personal preferences.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 172

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System - LDW*

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 173

Symbols and messages in the display

Symbol Message Specification

Lane departure warning

On/Off

The function is switched on/off.

Shown at switch-on/off.

The text disappears after 5 seconds.

Lane Depart Warn Availa-

ble

The function scans the carriageway's side markings.

Lane Depart Warn Unavail-

able

Speed is lower than 60 km/h, the carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor

is temporarily disengaged. Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 166.

Windscreen Sensors

blocked

The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.

Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.

Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.

Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 166.

Driver Alert Sys Service

required

The system is disengaged. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if the message remains.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 173

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System - LDW*

04

174 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Personal preferences

See the centre console display with its menu

system and there search for Car settings

Lane departure warning. Select the option

required, see page 116.

On at start up: This option sets the function in

standby mode each time the car is started.

Otherwise the same value as when the engine

was switched off is obtained.

Increased sensitivity: This option increases

sensitivity, an alarm is triggered earlier and

fewer limitations apply.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 174

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Park Assist*

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 175

General 1

Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking.

An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the

audio system display indicate the distance to

the detected obstacle.

Parking assistance is available in two variants:

Rear only

Both front and rear.

WARNING

Parking assistance does not relinquish the driver's own responsibility during parking. The sensors have blind spots where obsta- cles cannot be detected. Be aware of chil- dren and animals near the car.

Function

G 02

14 17

The system is automatically engaged when the

car is started and the switch's On/Off lamp is

illuminated. If parking assistance is switched

off with the button, the lamp goes out.

The centre console display shows an overview

of the relationship between the car and

detected obstacle.

Marked fields show which of the four sensors

detected an obstacle. The more marked fields

in the same bar, the shorter the distance

between the car and detected obstacle.

The frequency of the signal increases the

shorter the distance to an obstacle, in front of

or behind the car. Other sound from the audio

system is muted automatically.

Active

Active

Active

1

2

3

G 02

56 43

Display screens in different situations.

Display in car with only rear sensors.

Obstacle detected by both right-hand sen-

sors.

Display in car with both front and rear sen-

sors. The front right-hand sensor is 30 cm

or closer to a detected obstacle.

Display in car with both front and rear sen-

sors. Reverse gear engaged, no front or

rear obstacle detected.

When the distance is within 30 cm the tone is

constant and the marked sensors' bar is fully

filled in, see figure (2). If the detected obstacle

is within the distance for the constant tone both

behind and in front of the car, then the tone

sounds alternately from the loudspeakers.

1 Depending on the market, the Parking assistance system may be either Standard, Option or Accessory.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 175

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Park Assist*

04

176 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Rear parking assistance

G 02

14 23

The distance covered to the rear of the car is

about 1.5 metres. The acoustic signal for

obstacles behind comes from the rear loud-

speakers.

Rear parking assistance is activated when

reverse gear is engaged.

The system must be deactivated when revers-

ing with a trailer, or bike carrier on the towbar

or similar. Otherwise they would trigger the

sensors.

NOTE

Rear parking assistance is deactivated automatically when towing a trailer if Volvo genuine trailer wiring is used.

Front parking assistance

G 02

14 24

The distance covered to the front of the car is

about 0.8 metres. The acoustic signal for

obstacles in front comes from the front loud-

speaker.

Front parking assistance is active at speeds up

to 15 km/h, and also during reversing. The sys-

tem is deactivated at a higher speed. However,

the lamp in the button remains illuminated in

order to indicate that the system is activated

for the next time the driver shall park. When the

speed is below 10 km/h the system is reacti-

vated.

NOTE

Front parking assistance is deactivated when the parking brake is applied.

IMPORTANT

When fitting auxiliary lamps: Remember that they must not obscure the sensors the auxiliary lamps could then be detected as obstacles.

Fault indicator

If the information symbol illuminates

with constant glow and the informa-

tion display shows Park assist syst Service

required then parking assistance is disen-

gaged.

IMPORTANT

In certain conditions the parking assistance system may produce incorrect warning sig- nals that are caused by external audio sources that emit the same ultrasonic fre- quencies that the system works with.

Examples of such sources include horns, wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 176

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Park Assist*

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 177

Cleaning the sensors

G 02

89 33

Sensor location, front.

G 02

14 25

Sensor location, rear.

The sensors must be cleaned regularly to

ensure that they work properly. Clean them

with water and car shampoo.

NOTE

Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may cause incorrect warning signals.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 177

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

BLIS* Blind Spot Information System

04

178 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General information on BLIS

G 02

14 26

BLIS camera

Indicator lamp

BLIS symbol

BLIS is an information system based on cam-

era technology that under certain conditions

can help the driver to notice vehicles moving in

the same direction as the host vehicle in the so-

called "blind spot".

IMPORTANT

Repair of the BLIS system components must only be performed by an authorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING

The system is a supplement to, not a replacement for, a safe driving style and use of the rearview mirrors. It can never replace the driver's attention and responsibility. The responsibility for changing lanes safely always rests with the driver.

The system is designed to work most effec-

tively when driving in dense traffic on multi-lane

highways.

When a camera has detected a vehicle

inside the blind spot zone the indicator lamp

illuminates with a constant glow.

NOTE

The lamp illuminates on the side of the car where the system has detected the vehicle. If the car is overtaken on both sides at the same time then both lamps illuminate.

BLIS advises the driver with a message if a fault

arises in the system. If for example the sys-

tem's cameras are obscured then the BLIS

indicator lamp flashes and a message is shown

on the information display. In such cases,

check and clean the lenses.

If necessary, the system can be switched off

temporarily by pressing the BLIS button, see

page 178.

Blind spots

G 02

14 27

A = approx. 9.5 m and B = approx. 3 m

Activating/deactivating

G 02

14 28

Button for activating/deactivating.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 178

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

BLIS* Blind Spot Information System

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 179

BLIS is activated when the engine is started.

The indicator lamps in the door panels flash

three times when BLIS is activated.

The system can be deactivated/activated

when the engine is started by pressing the

BLIS button.

When BLIS is deactivated the light in the button

goes out and a text message is shown on the

dashboard display.

When BLIS is activated the light in the button

illuminates, a new text message is shown on

the display and the indicator lamps in the door

panels flash three times. Press the READ but-

ton to clear the text message. For more infor-

mation on messages, see page 119.

When BLIS operates

The system operates when the car is driven at

a speed above 10 km/h.

Overtaking The system is designed to react if:

you overtake another vehicle at a speed of up to 10 km/h faster than the other vehicle

you are overtaken by a vehicle travelling up to 70 km/h faster than you are travelling.

WARNING

BLIS does not work in sharp bends.

BLIS does not work when the car is revers- ing.

A wide trailer coupled to the car can conceal other vehicles in adjacent lanes. It can pre- vent the vehicle in the screened area from being detected by BLIS.

Daylight and darkness In daylight the system reacts to the shape of

the surrounding vehicles. The system is

designed to detect motor vehicles such as

cars, trucks, buses and motorcycles.

In darkness the system reacts to the head-

lamps of surrounding vehicles. If the head-

lamps of surrounding vehicles are not switched

on then the system does not detect the vehi-

cles. This means for example that the system

does not react to a trailer without headlamps

which is towed behind a car or truck.

WARNING

The system does not react to bicycles or mopeds.

The BLIS cameras can be disrupted by intensive light or when driving in the dark when there are no light sources (e.g. street lighting or other vehicles). The system may then interpret the lack of light as if the cam- eras have been blocked.

In both cases a message is shown in the information display.

When driving in such conditions system performance may be temporarily deterio- rate and a text message is shown, see page 179. If the message disappears auto- matically then BLIS has returned to normal functionality.

The BLIS cameras have limitations similar to the human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in heavy snowfall or thick fog for example.

Cleaning

In order to work most effectively the BLIS cam-

era lenses must be clean. The lenses can be

cleaned with a soft cloth or damp sponge.

Clean the lenses carefully so that they are not

scratched.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 179

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

BLIS* Blind Spot Information System

04

180 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

IMPORTANT

The lenses are electrically heated to melt ice or snow. If necessary, brush snow away from the lenses.

Messages on the display

Message Specification

Blind-spot info

system ON

BLIS system on

Blind spot syst.

Service required

BLIS not function-

ing.

Contact an author-

ised Volvo work-

shop.

Blind spot syst.

Camera blocked

The BLIS camera is

blocked by dirt,

snow or ice. Clean

the lenses.

Message Specification

Blind spot syst.

Reduced function

The BLIS camera is

disrupted by fog or

strong sunlight shin-

ing directly into the

camera.

The camera resets

itself when the envi-

ronment has

returned to normal.

Blind-spot info

system OFF

BLIS system off

Limitations

In some situations the BLIS indicator lamp may

illuminate despite there being no other vehicle

within the blind spot.

NOTE

If the BLIS indicator lamp illuminates on iso- lated occasions despite there being no other vehicle within the blind spot then this does not mean that a fault has arisen in the system.

In the event of a fault in the BLIS system the display shows the text Blind spot syst. Service required.

Here are several examples of situations where

the BLIS indicator lamp may illuminate even if

there is no other vehicle within the blind spot.

G 02

14 30

Reflection from shiny wet road surface.

G 02

14 31

Own shadow on large light smooth surface, e.g. noise barrier or concrete road surface.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 180

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

BLIS* Blind Spot Information System

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 181

G 02

14 32

Low stationary sunlight shining into the camera.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 181

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Comfort inside the passenger compartment

04

182

Storage spaces

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 182

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Comfort inside the passenger compartment

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 183

Storage compartment in door panel

Storage pocket* on front edge of front seat

cushions

Ticket clip

Glovebox

Storage compartment, cup holder

Jacket holder

Cup holder* in armrest, rear seat

Storage pocket

Jacket holder The jacket holder is only designed for light

clothing.

Tunnel console

G 02

39 85

Storage compartment (e.g. for CD discs)

and AUX input under the armrest (and stor-

age tray*).

Includes cup holder for driver and passen-

ger, and 12 V socket and small compart-

ment. (If ashtray and cigarette lighter are

specified then the 12 V socket is replaced

by a cigarette lighter and the small com-

partment by a detachable ashtray.)

Cigarette lighter and ashtray* The ashtray in the tunnel console is emptied by

lifting it straight up.

Activate the lighter by pushing in the button.

The button pops out when the lighter is hot. Pull

out the lighter and light a cigarette on the

heated coils.

Glovebox

G 02

42 06

The owner's manual and maps can be kept

here for example. There are also holders for

pens on the inside of the lid. The glovebox can

be locked with the key blade, see page 43.

Floor mats*

Volvo supplies specially manufactured floor

mats.

WARNING

The floor mat at the driver's seat must be firmly fitted and secured in the attachment clips to prevent it from being trapped around and under the pedals.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 183

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Comfort inside the passenger compartment

04

184 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Vanity mirror

G 02

14 38

Vanity mirror with lighting.

The light illuminates automatically when the

cover is lifted.

12 V socket

G 02

14 39

12 V socket in tunnel console, front seat.

G 02

14 40

12 V socket in tunnel console, rear seat.

The electrical socket can be used for 12 V

accessories, such as mobile phone chargers

and coolers. The maximum current is 10 A. For

the socket to supply current, the remote con-

trol key must be in at least position I, see

page 70.

WARNING

Always leave the plug in the socket when the socket is not in use.

Electrical socket in cargo area*

G 02

14 42

Fold down the cover to access the electrical

socket. It works irrespective of whether or not

the ignition is switched on.

NOTE

Do not use the electric socket with the engine switched off as there is a risk of the battery becoming discharged.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 184

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Comfort inside the passenger compartment - Executive

04

185

Refrigerator

G 02

18 57

It is located behind the rear seat armrest and

has a capacity of 11.5 litres. The refrigerator is

always operational when the engine is running

or the remote control key is in position II and it

is switched off when the engine is switched off.

WARNING

Store bottles well sealed in the refrigerator and make sure that the refrigerator door is closed for the journey.

NOTE

The refrigerator needs a free circulation of air for optimum functionality. For this rea- son, leave at least 5 cm of free space at the refrigerator air intake in the cargo area.

Mat in cargo area

G 02

18 58

NOTE

The rear seat must be folded forward slightly in cars with refrigerator before the cargo area mat can be removed. Fold the backrest forward by pulling the handle, see page 73.

Glass

G 02

18 59

There is a storage compartment for two

glasses and a bottle opener under the cover in

the armrest.

WARNING

Store glasses in the storage compartment or in cup holders and make sure that the armrest cover is closed for the journey.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 185

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Bluetooth handsfree*

04

186 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General

G 02

14 43

System overview.

Mobile phone

Microphone

Steering wheel keypad

Centre console

BluetoothTM

A mobile phone equipped with BluetoothTM

can be connected wirelessly to the audio sys-

tem. The audio system then works handsfree,

with the option to control a range of the mobile

phone's functions remotely. The mobile phone

can be operated by its own keys irrespective of

whether or not it is connected.

NOTE

Only a selection of mobile phones is fully compatible with the handsfree function. Information on compatible phones is avail- able at Volvo dealers and at www.volvocars.com.

Phone functions, controls overview

G 02

14 44

Centre console control panel.

VOLUME Same functionality available in

steering wheel keypad.

Number and letter buttons

PHONE - On/off and standby mode

Navigation button

EXIT - End/refuse phone calls, clear

entered characters, interrupt current func-

tion. Same functionality available in steer-

ing wheel keypad.

ENTER Accept calls. A press of the but-

ton reveals latest dialled numbers. Same

functionality available in steering wheel

keypad.

Remember

The menus are controlled from the centre con-

sole and the steering wheel keypad. For gen-

eral information on menus, see page 116.

Activating/deactivating A short press on PHONE activates the hands-

free function. The text PHONE at the top of the

display shows that it is in phone mode. The

symbol shows that the handsfree func-

tion is active.

One long press on PHONE deactivates the

handsfree function and disconnects a con-

nected phone.

Connect mobile phone A mobile phone is connected in different ways

depending on whether or not it has been con-

nected previously. To connect a mobile phone

for the first time, follow the instructions below:

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 186

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Bluetooth handsfree*

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 187

Alternative 1 - via the car's menu system

1. Make the mobile phone detectable/visible

via BluetoothTM, see mobile phone manual

or www.volvocars.com.

2. Activate the handsfree function with

PHONE.

> Menu option Add phone appears on

the display. If one or more mobile

phones have already been registered

then these are also shown.

3. Select Add phone.

> The audio system searches for mobile

phones in the vicinity. The search takes

approximately 30 seconds. The mobile

phones detected are specified with their

respective BluetoothTM name in the dis-

play. The handsfree function's

BluetoothTM name is shown in the

mobile phone such as My Car.

4. Choose one of the mobile phones in the

audio system display.

5. Enter the number series shown in the audio

system display via the mobile phone key-

pad.

Alternative 2 - via the phone's menu system

1. Activate the handsfree function with

PHONE. If there is a phone connected,

disconnect the connected phone.

2. Search with the phone's BluetoothTM, see

the mobile phone manual.

3. Select My Car in the list of units detected

in your mobile phone.

4. Enter the PIN code '1234' into the mobile

phone when prompted for the PIN code.

5. Select to connect to My Car from the

mobile phone.

The mobile phone is registered and connected

automatically to the audio system while the text

Synchronising is shown in the display. For

more information on how mobile phones are

registered, see page 189.

When the connection is established the symbol

is shown and the mobile phone

BluetoothTM name is shown in the display. Now

the mobile phone can be controlled from the

audio system.

To call 1. Make sure that the text PHONE is shown

at the top of the display and that the

symbol is visible.

2. Dial the number or use the phone book,

see page 189.

3. Press ENTER.

The call is interrupted with EXIT.

Disconnecting the mobile phone Automatic disconnection takes place if the

mobile phone moves out of the audio system's

range. For more information on connection,

see page 189.

Manual disconnection takes place by deacti-

vating the handsfree function with one long

press on PHONE. The handsfree function is

also deactivated when the engine is switched

off or when a door is opened 1.

When the mobile phone has been discon-

nected an ongoing call can be continued with

the mobile phone's built-in microphone and

speaker.

1 Only Keyless Drive

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 187

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Bluetooth handsfree*

04

188 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

NOTE

Some mobile phones require that the changeover from handsfree is confirmed from the phone's keypad.

Making and receiving calls

Incoming call Calls are accepted with ENTER even if the

audio system is in CD or FM mode for example.

Refuse or end with EXIT.

Automatic answer The automatic answer function means that

calls are accepted automatically.

Activate/deactivate under Phone settings

Call options Automatic answer.

In call menu Press MENU or ENTER during an ongoing call

to access the following functions:

Mute microphone - audio system micro- phone is muted.

Transfer call to mobile - the call is trans- ferred to the mobile phone.

NOTE

With certain mobile phones the connection is terminated when the privacy function is used. This is normal. The handsfree function asks if you want to reconnect.

Phone book searching in the phone book.

NOTE

A new call cannot be started during an ongoing call.

Audio settings

Phone call volume The call volume can be regulated when the

handsfree function is in phone mode. Use the

steering wheel keypad or VOLUME.

Audio system volume Providing there is no ongoing call taking place,

the audio system volume is controlled as usual

with VOLUME. In order to control audio system

volume during an ongoing call you have to

switch to one of the audio sources.

The audio source can be automatically muted

for incoming calls under Phone settings

Sounds and volume Mute radio.

Ring volume

Go to Phone settings Sounds and volume

Ring volume and adjust with / on the

navigation button.

Ring signals The handsfree function has integrated ring sig-

nals that can be selected under Phone

settings Sounds and volume Ring

signals Ring signal 1, 2, 3 etc.

NOTE

The connected mobile phone's ring signal is not deactivated when one of the handsfree system's integrated signals is used.

In order to select the connected phone's ring

signal 2, go to Phone settings Sounds and

volume Ring signals Use mobile

phone signal.

2 Not supported by all mobile phones.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 188

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Bluetooth handsfree*

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 189

More on registering and connecting

A maximum of five mobile phones can be reg-

istered. Registration is performed once per

phone. After registration the phone no longer

needs to be visible/detectable. A maximum of

one mobile phone can be connected at a time.

Phones can be deregistered under Bluetooth

Remove phone.

Automatic connection When the handsfree function is active and the

last mobile phone connected is in range it is

connected automatically. When the audio sys-

tem searches for the last phone connected its

name is shown in the display. To change over

to manual connection of another phone, press

EXIT.

Manual connection If you want to connect a mobile phone other

than the last connected or change the con-

nected mobile phone, proceed as follows:

1. Set the audio system in phone mode.

2. Press PHONE and select one of the

phones in the list.

The connection can also be made via the menu

system under Bluetooth Connect phone

or Change phone.

Phone book

All use of the phone book presupposes that the

text PHONE is shown at the top of the display

and that the symbol is visible.

The audio system stores a copy of the phone

book from each registered mobile phone. The

phone book is copied automatically to the

audio system during each connection.

Deactivate the function under Phone

settings Synchronise phone book.

Searching for contacts is only performed in

the connected mobile phone's phone

book.

NOTE

If the mobile phone does not support copy- ing of the phone book then List is empty is shown when copying is finished.

If the phone book contains a ringing caller's

contact information then this is shown in the

display.

Searching for contacts The easiest way to search in the phone book is

with long presses on the keys 29. This starts

a search in the phone book based on the key's

first letter.

The phone book can also be reached with /

on the navigation button or with / on

the steering wheel keypad. The search can also

be performed from the phone book's Search

menu under Phone book Search:

1. Enter the first few letters of the contact and

press ENTER, or simply press ENTER.

2. Scroll to a contact and press ENTER to

call.

Voice recognition The mobile phone's voice recognition function

for dialling can be used by holding in ENTER.

Voice mail number Voice mail number can be changed under

Phone settings Call options Voice mail

number. If there is no number stored then this

menu can be reached with one long press on

1. Press 1 for a long time to use the stored

number.

Call lists The call lists are copied to the handsfree func-

tion at each new connection and are then

updated during the connection. Press ENTER

to show the last dialled. Other call lists are

available under Call register.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 189

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Bluetooth handsfree*

04

190 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

NOTE

Certain mobile phones show a list of the last dialled calls in reverse order.

Inputting text Input text using the keypad in the centre con-

sole. Press once for the key's first character,

twice for the second etc. Continue pressing for

more characters, see the following table.

A short press on EXIT deletes an input char-

acter. One long press on EXIT clears all input

characters. / on the navigation button

scrolls between the characters.

Key Function

Space . 1 - ? ! , : " ' ( )

A B C 2

D E F 3

G H I 4

J K L 5

M N O 6

Key Function

P Q R S 7

T U V 8

W X Y Z 9

Pressed briefly if two characters

shall be entered after each other

with the same key.

+ 0 @ * # & $ / %

Shift between upper and lower

case letter

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 190

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Built-in phone*

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 191

General

G 02

14 46

System overview.

Microphone

SIM card reader

Keypad, see page 133.

Control panel

Privacy handset

Safety Only entrust phone servicing to an authorised

Volvo workshop. The built-in phone must be

switched off during refuelling or in the vicinity

of blasting work. IDIS limits the menu system

depending on the speed of the car, see

page 193.

Remember

SIM card The phone can only be used with a valid SIM

card (Subscriber Identity Module). For installa-

tion, see page 194. Emergency calls to emer-

gency numbers can be made without a SIM

card.

NOTE

The built-in phone cannot read 3G type SIM cards. Combined 3G/GSM cards work. Contact the network operator if the SIM card needs to be changed.

Menus and controls The menus are navigated using the control

panel and the steering wheel keypad.

For general information on menus, see

page 116. For information on the phone's con-

trols, see page 186.

On/Off Switch on the phone with a short press on

PHONE. Enter the PIN code if necessary. The

symbol shows that the phone is

switched on. When this symbol is shown calls

can be received even if the CD menu for exam-

ple is shown in the display. Briefly press

PHONE to use the phone menus and to dial

out. The text PHONE shows that the phone

menu is active.

Switch off the phone with one long press on

PHONE.

Making and receiving calls

Making calls 1. Switch on the phone.

2. If PHONE is not shown in the display,

briefly press PHONE.

3. Dial the number or use the phone book,

see page 192.

4. Press ENTER for handsfree calls or pick up

the privacy handset. Release the handset

by pulling it down.

Ending a call End a call by pressing EXIT or by hanging up

the privacy handset.

Incoming call Press ENTER for handsfree calls or pick up the

privacy handset. If the privacy handset is off

the hook when the phone rings then calls must

be received using ENTER.

End calls by pressing EXIT or by hanging up

the privacy handset. Refuse calls using EXIT.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 191

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Built-in phone*

04

192 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Automatic answer See page 188.

Call waiting The function enables a new call to be answered

during an ongoing call. The new call is

answered as usual and the previous call is put

on hold.

Activate/deactivate under Phone settings

Call options Call waiting.

Automatic diversions Incoming calls can be diverted automatically

depending on the type of call and situation.

Activate/deactivate under Call options

Diversions.

During a call

Press MENU or ENTER during a call to access

the In-call menu.

To call 1. Put the call on hold under Hold.

2. Dial the number of the third party or use the

Phone book menu option.

Switch between calls using the Swap menu

option.

Conference call A conference call consists of several parties. It

can be initiated when a call is underway and

another is on hold. The Join menu option starts

the conference call.

All ongoing calls are disconnected if the con-

ference call is terminated.

Switching between the privacy handset

and handsfree Switch from handsfree to the privacy handset

by picking up the privacy handset or selecting

Handset in the menu.

Switch from the privacy handset to handsfree

using the Handsfree menu option.

Mute mode Mute mode involves deactivating the micro-

phone, see page 191.

Activate/deactivate the microphone using

the Microphone On/Off menu option.

Audio settings

Phone call volume The phone uses the front door speakers. Call

volume can be controlled when the text

PHONE is shown at the top of the display.

Use the steering wheel keypad or

VOLUME.

Audio system volume See page135.

Signals and volume Change the ring signal under Phone settings

Sounds and volume Ring signals.

Activate/deactivate the message beep under

Phone settings Sounds and volume

Message beep.

Control the ring volume under Phone settings

Sounds and volume Ring volume.

Adjust using / on the navigation button.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 192

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Built-in phone*

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 193

Phone book

Contact information can be stored on the SIM

card or in the phone.

Storing contacts in the phone book 1. Press MENU and scroll to Phone book

New contact.

2. Enter a name and press ENTER. For infor-

mation on text input, see below.

3. Enter a number and press ENTER.

4. Scroll to SIM card or Phone memory and

press ENTER.

Inputting text See page 190.

Searching for contacts See page 189.

Erasing contacts Erase a contact in the phone book by selecting

it and pressing ENTER. Then scroll to Erase and press ENTER.

Erase all contacts under Phone book Erase

SIM or Erase phone.

Copying entries between the SIM card

and the phone book

Go to Phone book Copy all SIM to

phone or Phone to SIM and press ENTER.

Voice mail number See page 189.

Other functions and settings

IDIS IDIS (Intelligent Driver Information System)

can, in active driving situations, delay or refuse

ring signals from incoming calls. This way less

attention is distracted from driving.

IDIS is deactivated under Phone settings

IDIS.

Reading messages 1. Scroll to Messages Read and press

ENTER.

2. Scroll to a message and press ENTER.

3. The message text is shown in the display.

Additional selections can be made by

pressing ENTER.

Writing and sending messages 1. Scroll to Messages Write new and

press ENTER.

2. Enter text and press ENTER. For informa-

tion on text input, see page 190.

3. Scroll to Send and press ENTER.

4. Enter a phone number and press ENTER.

Message settings Message settings are not normally changed.

The network provider has further information

on these settings. There are three options

under Messages Message settings:

SMSC number - Specifies the message centre which will transfer the messages.

Validity time - Specifies how long the message will be stored in the message centre.

Message type.

Call lists Lists of received, dialled and missed calls are

stored in Call register. Dialled calls are also

shown by pressing ENTER. The phone num-

bers in the lists can be saved in the phone

book.

Call duration

Call duration is stored under Call register

Call duration.

Reset the values under Call register

Call duration Reset timers.

Show/hide number for third party The phone number can be temporarily hidden

under Call options Send my number.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 193

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Built-in phone*

04

194 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

IMEI number In order to block a phone the network provider

must be advised of the phone's IMEI number.

Dial *#06# to show the number in the dis-

play. Write it down and keep it in a safe

place.

Network selection The network can be selected either automati-

cally or manually under Phone settings

Network selection.

SIM code and security The PIN code can protect the SIM card from

unauthorised use.

The code can be changed under Phone

settings Edit PIN code.

Change the security level under Phone

settings SIM security.

Select maximum security with the On option.

The code will then need to be entered each

time the phone is switched on.

Select the next highest security level with the

Automatic option. The phone then stores the

code and automatically specifies it when the

phone is switched on. When the SIM card is

used with another phone the code must be

entered manually.

Select minimum security with the Off option.

The SIM card can then be used without the

code at all.

Reset to factory settings The phone settings are fully reset under Phone

settings Reset phone settings.

Installing the SIM card

G 02

14 50

G 02

14 51

Make sure that the phone is deactivated.

Pull out the SIM card holder which is

located in the glovebox.

Place the SIM card with the metal surface

visible and fit the cover on the SIM card

holder . Refit the SIM card holder.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 194

henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

04

195

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 195

henrikrosenqvist

196 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Recommendations during driving......................................................... 198

Refuelling.............................................................................................. 200

Fuel....................................................................................................... 201

Loading................................................................................................. 204

Cargo area ........................................................................................... 205

Warning triangle*................................................................................... 207

Driving with a trailer.............................................................................. 208

Towing and recovery............................................................................. 213

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 196

henrikrosenqvist

05 DURING YOUR JOURNEY

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 197

henrikrosenqvist

05 During your journey

Recommendations during driving

05

198

General

Economical driving Economical driving and reducing environmen-

tal impact result from driving gently with antic-

ipation and adapting your driving style and

speed to the current situation (for further

advice on how you can reduce environmental

impact, see page 9).

Do not let the engine idle, but drive at light loads as soon as it is possible.

A cold engine consumes more fuel than a warm one.

Do not drive with unnecessary loads in the car.

Do not use winter tyres when the roads are dry.

Remove the load carrier when it is not in use.

Use the parking heater* in cold weather so that the engine reaches its normal operat- ing temperature more quickly.

Driving in water The car can be driven through water at a maxi-

mum depth of 25 cm at a maximum speed of

10 km/h. Extra caution should be exercised

when passing through flowing water.

During driving in water, maintain a low speed

and do not stop the car. When the water has

been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly

and check that full brake function is achieved.

Water and mud for example can make the

brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake

function.

Clean the electric contacts of the electric

engine block heater and trailer coupling after

driving in water and mud.

Do not let the car stand with water over the sills

for any long period of time. This could cause

electrical malfunctions.

IMPORTANT

Engine damage can occur if water enters the air filter.

In depths greater than 25 cm, water could enter the transmission. This reduces the lubricating ability of the oils and shortens the service life of the systems.

In the event of stalling in water, do not try to restart - tow the car out of the water to an authorised Volvo workshop. Risk of engine breakdown.

Engine and cooling system Under special conditions, for example when

driving in hilly terrain, extreme heat or with

heavy loads, there is a risk that the engine and

cooling system will overheat. Proceed as fol-

lows to avoid overheating the engine.

Maintain a low speed when driving with a trailer up long, steep ascents.

Do not turn the engine off immediately you stop after a hard drive.

NOTE

It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to operate for a while after the engine has been switched off.

Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front of the grille when driving in extreme high temperatures.

Do not exceed engine speeds of 4500 rpm (3500 rpm for diesel engines) if driving with a trailer or caravan in hilly ter- rain. The oil temperature could become too high.

Open boot lid Avoid driving with the boot lid open. If it is how-

ever necessary, only drive for a short distance.

Close all windows, set the air distribution to the

windscreen and floor and run the fan at the

highest speed.

WARNING

Do not drive with the boot lid open. Toxic exhaust fumes can be drawn into the car through the cargo area.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 198

henrikrosenqvist

05 During your journey

Recommendations during driving

05

199

Do not overload the battery The electrical functions in the car load the bat-

tery to varying degrees. Avoid using the ignition

position II when the engine is switched off. Use

ignition position I instead, as less power is con-

sumed.

Also, be aware of different accessories that

load the electrical system. Do not use functions

which use a lot of power when the engine is

switched off. Examples of functions that use a

lot of power:

ventilation fan

windscreen wipers

audio system (high volume)

parking lamps

If the battery voltage is low, a message appears

on the information display. The energy-saving

function shuts down certain functions or

reduces certain functions such as the ventila-

tion fan and audio system. Charge the battery

by starting the engine.

Before a long journey

Check that the engine is working normally and that fuel consumption is normal.

Make sure that there are no leaks (fuel, oil or other fluid).

Check all bulbs and tyre tread depths.

Carrying a warning triangle is a legal requirement in certain countries.

Winter driving Check the following in particular before the

cold season:

The engine coolant must contain at least 50% glycol. This mixture protects the engine down to approximately 35 C. To achieve optimum antifreeze protection, different types of glycol must not be mixed.

The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent condensation.

Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate star- ting in cold weather and also reduce fuel consumption while the engine is cold. For more information on suitable oils, see page 271.

IMPORTANT

Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard driving or in hot weather.

The condition of the battery and charge level must be inspected. Cold weather pla- ces great demands on the battery and its capacity is reduced by the cold.

Use washer fluid to avoid ice forming in the washer fluid reservoir.

To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo rec-

ommends using winter tyres on all four wheels

if there is a risk of snow or ice.

NOTE

The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement in certain countries. Studded tyres are not permitted in certain countries.

Slippery driving conditions Practise driving on slippery surfaces under

controlled conditions to learn how the car

reacts.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 199

henrikrosenqvist

05 During your journey

Refuelling

05

200

Refuelling

Opening/closing the fuel filler flap

G 02

14 59

Open the fuel filler flap using the button on the

lighting panel. The filler flap is located on the

right-hand rear wing, as indicated by the sym-

bol's arrow in the information display.

Close the fuel filler flap by pressing it in until a

click confirms that it is closed.

Opening/closing the fuel cap

WARNING! AVERTISSEMENT!

ACHTUNG!

G 02

13 95

A certain overpressure may arise in the tank in

the event of high outside temperatures. Open

the cap slowly.

After refuelling, refit the cap and turn it until one

or more clicking sounds are heard.

Filling up with fuel Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump

nozzle cuts out.

NOTE

Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot weather.

Opening the fuel filler flap manually

G 02

46 31

The fuel filler flap can be opened manually

when electric opening from the passenger

compartment is not possible.

Open the side hatch in the cargo area

(same side as fuel filler flap).

Locate the green cord with handle.

Pull the cord straight back until the fuel filler

flap folds out with a "click".

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 200

henrikrosenqvist

05 During your journey

Fuel

05

201

General information on fuel

Fuel of a lower quality than that recommended

by Volvo must not be used as engine power

and fuel consumption is negatively affected.

WARNING

Always avoid inhaling fuel fumes and fuel splashing in the eyes.

If fuel gets into your eyes, take out contact lenses if worn and rinse your eyes with plenty of water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention.

Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol, bioethanol and mixtures of the two, as well as diesel, are highly toxic and could cause permanent injury or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical attention immediately if fuel has been swallowed.

WARNING

Fuel which spills onto the ground can be ignited.

Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star- ting to refuel.

Never carry an activated mobile phone when refuelling. The ring signal could cause spark build-up and ignite petrol fumes, leading to fire and injury.

IMPORTANT

The use of other fuels for each respective engine type, other than recommended here by Volvo, could cause engine damage and impaired performance.

The use of other fuels also invalidates Vol- vo's warranties as well as any supplemen- tary service agreement.

NOTE

Extreme weather conditions, driving with a trailer or driving at high altitudes in combi- nation with fuel grade are factors that could affect the car's performance.

Petrol

Petrol must meet the EN 228 standard. Most

engines can be run with octane ratings of 95

and 98 RON. 91 RON should only be used in

exceptional cases.

95 RON can be used for normal driving.

98 RON is recommended for optimum per- formance and minimum fuel consumption.

When driving in temperatures above +38 C,

fuel with the highest possible octane rating is

recommended for optimum performance and

fuel economy.

IMPORTANT

Always refuel with unleaded petrol so as not to damage the catalytic converter.

In order that Volvo's warranty shall remain valid, never mix alcohol with pet- rol, as the fuel system could be dam- aged.

Do not use additives not recommended by Volvo.

Catalytic converters The purpose of the catalytic converters is to

purify exhaust gases. They are located close to

the engine so that operating temperature is

reached quickly.

The catalytic converters consist of a monolith

(ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel

walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum/rho-

dium/palladium. These metals act as catalysts,

i.e. they participate in and accelerate a chem-

ical reaction without being used up them-

selves.

Lambda-sondTM oxygen sensor The Lambda-sond is part of a control system

intended to reduce emissions and improve fuel

economy.

An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen content

of the exhaust gases leaving the engine. This

value is fed into an electronic system that con-

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 201

henrikrosenqvist

05 During your journey

Fuel

05

202

tinuously controls the injectors. The ratio of fuel

to air directed to the engine is continuously

adjusted. These adjustments create optimal

conditions for efficient combustion, and

together with the three-way catalytic converter

reduce harmful emissions (hydrocarbons, car-

bon monoxide and nitrous oxides).

Bioethanol E85

Do not modify the fuel system or its compo-

nents, and do not replace components with

parts that are not specifically designed for use

with bioethanol.

WARNING

Methanol must not be used. A decal on the inside of the fuel filler flap shows the correct alternative fuel.

The use of components not designed for bioethanol engines could cause fire, injury or engine damage.

Reserve fuel can The reserve fuel can should be filled with petrol,

see page 97.

WARNING

Ethanol is sensitive to sparks, and explosive gases could form in the reserve fuel can if it is refuelled with ethanol.

Diesel

Diesel must fulfil the EN 590 or JIS K2204

standards. Diesel engines are sensitive to con-

taminants, such as excessively high volumes

of sulphur particles for example. Only use die-

sel fuel from well-known producers. Never use

diesel of dubious quality.

At low temperatures (-40 C to -6 C), a paraffin

precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which

may lead to ignition problems. Special diesel

fuel designed for low temperatures around

freezing point is available from the major oil

companies. This fuel is less viscous at low tem-

peratures and reduces the risk of paraffin pre-

cipitate.

The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is

reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When

refuelling, check that the area around the fuel

filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the

paintwork. Wash off any spillage with deter-

gent and water.

IMPORTANT

Only ever use fuel that fulfils the European diesel standard.

The sulphur content must be a maximum of 50 ppm.

IMPORTANT

Diesel type fuels which must not be used:

Special additives

Marine Diesel Fuel

Fuel oil

RME 1 (Rape Methyl Ester) and vegeta- ble oil.

These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in accordance with Volvo recommendations and generate increased wear and engine damage that is not covered by the Volvo warranty.

Empty tank No special procedures are required if the tank

runs dry. The fuel system is bled automatically

if the remote control is kept in key position II

(see page 70) for approx. 60 seconds before

the start attempt.

1 Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of RME, but further amounts must not be added.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 202

henrikrosenqvist

05 During your journey

Fuel

05

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 203

Draining condensation from the fuel filter The fuel filter separates condensation from the

fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine opera-

tion.

The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals

specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet

or if you suspect that the car has been filled

with contaminated fuel.

IMPORTANT

Certain special additives remove the water separation in the fuel filter.

Diesel particle filter (DPF) Diesel cars are equipped with a particle filter,

which results in more efficient emission con-

trol. The particles in the exhaust gases are

collected in the filter during normal driving. So-

called "regeneration" is started in order to burn

away the particles and empty the filter. This

requires the engine to have reached normal

operating temperature.

Regeneration of the filter takes place automat-

ically at an interval of approximately

300-900 km depending on driving conditions.

Regeneration normally takes 10-20 minutes. It

may take a little longer at a low average speed.

Fuel consumption may increase slightly during

regeneration.

Regeneration in cold weather If the car is frequently driven short distances in

cold weather then the engine does not reach

normal operating temperature. This means that

regeneration of the diesel particle filter does

not take place and the filter is not emptied.

When the filter has become approximately

80% full of particles, a warning triangle on the

instrument panel illuminates, and the message

Soot filter full. See manual is shown on the

instrument panel display.

Start regeneration of the filter by driving the car

until the engine reaches normal operating tem-

perature, preferably on a main road or motor-

way. The car should then be driven for

approximately ca 20 minutes more.

When regeneration is complete the warning

text is cleared automatically.

Use the parking heater* in cold weather so that

the engine reaches normal operating tempera-

ture more quickly.

IMPORTANT

If the filter fills up with particles then it can be difficult to start the engine and the filter will be incapable of functioning. Then there is a risk that the filter will have to be replaced.

Fuel consumption and emissions of carbon dioxide

Fuel consumption figures may change if the car

is equipped with extra equipment that affects

the car's weight. See the table on page 275.

The manner in which the car is driven, and

other non-technical factors can also affect fuel

consumption.

Consumption is higher and power output lower

for fuel with an octane rating of 91 RON.

NOTE

Extreme weather conditions, towing a trailer or driving at high altitudes in combination with fuel grade are factors that could affect the car's performance.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 203

henrikrosenqvist

05 During your journey

Loading

05

204

General

The load capacity is affected by what is moun-

ted on the car, such as a towbar, load carriers

and roof box. The load capacity of the car is

also reduced by the number of passengers and

their weight.

WARNING

The car's driving characteristics change depending on the weight and distribution of the load.

Loading the cargo area Stop the engine and apply the parking brake

when loading or unloading long objects. The

gear lever/selector can be knocked out of posi-

tion by long loads, which could set the car in

motion.

The boot lid can be opened via a but-

ton on the lighting panel or the

remote control key, see page 51.

Position the load firmly against the back- rest in front.

Put wide loads in the centre.

Heavy objects should be placed as low as possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on a lowered backrest.

Cover sharp edges with something soft to avoid damaging the upholstery.

Secure all loads to the load retaining eye- lets with straps or web lashings.

WARNING

A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, carry the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg.

Always secure the load.

WARNING

The protection provided by the inflatable curtain in the headlining may be compro- mised or eliminated if the load is too high. Never load cargo above the backrest. Dur- ing heavy braking the load may otherwise shift, causing injury to the car's occupants.

Lowering the rear seat backrest

If the rear seat needs to be lowered, see

page 73.

Load retaining eyelets

G 02

14 62

The folding load retaining eyelets are used to

fasten straps in order to anchor items in the

cargo area

WARNING

Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects that are loose or protrude could cause injury during heavy braking. Always secure large and heavy objects with a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 204

henrikrosenqvist

05 During your journey

Cargo area

05

205

Bag holder

G 02

14 63

The bag holder keeps carrier bags in place and

prevents them from overturning and spreading

their contents across the cargo area.

1. Open the hatch that is part of the floor in

the cargo area.

2. Tension and secure the carrier bags using

the strap.

Ski hatch

The hatch in the backrest can be opened to

transport long narrow items.

G 02

14 78

G 02

14 79

G 02

14 80

Fold the right-hand backrest forward.

Release the hatch in the rear seat backrest

by sliding the bolt up while pressing the

hatch down/forward.

Fold back the backrest with the hatch

open.

NOTE

If the car is equipped with an integrated booster cushion*, fold it out first.

Use the seatbelt to prevent the load from mov-

ing.

WARNING

Stop the engine and apply the parking brake when loading and unloading. Otherwise the gear lever/selector can accidentally be knocked and moved to a driving position.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 205

henrikrosenqvist

05 During your journey

Cargo area

05

206

Hatch behind integrated booster cushion The hatch is not fixed into the backrest with

hinges but is detachable instead.

Removing the hatch After the hatch has been released and the

backrest folded backwards, open the hatch

approx. 30 degrees and pull it straight up.

Installing the hatch Refit the hatch in the grooves behind the

upholstery and close the hatch.

Front seat

The passenger seat backrest can also be

folded for an extra long load, see page 71.

Roof load

Using load carriers To avoid damaging the car and for maximum

possible safety while driving, the load carriers

designed by Volvo are recommended.

Carefully follow the installation instructions

supplied with the carriers.

Check periodically that the load carriers and load are properly secured. Lash the load securely with retaining straps.

Distribute the load evenly over the load carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the bottom.

The size of the area exposed to the wind, and therefore fuel consumption, increase with the size of the load.

Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration, heavy braking and hard cornering.

WARNING

The car's centre of gravity and driving cha- racteristics are altered by roof loads. For information on maximum permitted roof load, including load carriers and any space box, see page 265.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 206

henrikrosenqvist

05 During your journey

Warning triangle*

05

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 207

G 01

53 51

G 01

53 52

G 01

53 53

The warning triangle is fitted on the inside of

the boot lid with two clips.

Detach the warning triangle case by pulling

both of the snap latches outwards.

Take the warning triangle from the case,

fold out and assemble the two loose sides.

Fold out the warning triangle's support

legs.

Follow the regulations for the use of a warning

triangle. Position the warning triangle in a suit-

able place with regard to traffic.

Ensure the warning triangle and its case are

properly secured in the cargo area after use.

First aid*

A case with first aid equipment is located in the

cargo area.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 207

henrikrosenqvist

05 During your journey

Driving with a trailer

05

208

General

If the towing bracket is mounted by Volvo, then

the car is delivered with the necessary equip-

ment for driving with a trailer.

The car's towing bracket must be of an approved type.

If the towbar is retrofitted, check with your Volvo dealer that the car is fully equipped for driving with a trailer.

Distribute the load on the trailer so that the weight on the towing bracket complies with the specified maximum towball load.

Increase the tyre pressure to the recom- mended pressure for a full load. For tyre pressure label location, see page 254.

Clean the towing bracket regularly and grease the towball.

Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is brand new. Wait until it has been driven at least 1000 km.

The brakes are loaded much more than usual on long and steep downhill slopes. Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your speed.

The engine is loaded more heavily than usual when driving with a trailer.

If the car is driven with a heavy load in a hot climate, the engine may overheat. If the temperature in the engine's cooling system is too high the warning symbol is illumi-

nated and the information display shows High engine temp Stop safely. Stop the car in a safe way and allow the engine to run at idling speed for several minutes and cool down. If High engine temp Stop engine or Coolant level low, Stop engine are shown then the engine must be switched off after stopping the car.

The automatic gearbox has a built-in pro- tection system that engages in the event of overheating. If the temperature in the gear- box is too high the warning symbol is illu- minated and the information display shows Transmission hot Reduce speed or Transmission hot Stop safely. Follow the instructions and reduce speed or stop the car in a safe way and allow the engine to run at idling speed for several minutes to enable the gearbox to cool down. In the event of overheating the car's air condi- tioning may be temporarily switched off.

In the interests of safety, you should restrict speed to 80 km/h, even if the laws of certain countries allow for higher speeds.

Move the gear selector to position P when parking an automatic car with a hitched trailer. Always use the parking brake. Block the wheels with chocks when parking a car with hitched trailer on a hill.

Trailer cable An adapter is required if the car's towing

bracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer has

7 pin electrics. Use an adapter cable approved

by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag

on the ground.

Direction indicators on trailer A symbol in the combined instrument panel

flashes when the direction indicators are used

and the trailer is connected. If the symbol

flashes more quickly then one of the lamps on

the car or the trailer is broken, see page 64.

Automatic gearbox

Parking on a hill 1. Activate the parking brake.

2. Move the gear selector to position P.

Starting on a hill 1. Move the gear selector to position D.

2. Release the parking brake.

Steep inclines

Do not use a higher manual gear than the engine can "handle". It is not always eco- nomical to drive in high gears.

Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more than 15%.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 208

henrikrosenqvist

05 During your journey

Driving with a trailer

05

209

Level control The rear shock absorbers maintain a constant

height irrespective of the car's load (up to the

maximum permissible weight). When the car is

stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly,

which is normal.

Trailer weights National vehicle regulations can limit trailer

weights and speeds. The towbar can be certi-

fied for a higher towing weight than the car can

actually tow. For Volvo's permitted trailer

weights, see page 266.

WARNING

Follow the stated recommendations for trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer may be difficult to control in the event of sudden movement and braking.

Towing bracket

If the car is equipped with a detachable towbar,

the towball mounting instructions must be fol-

lowed carefully, see page 210.

WARNING

If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable towbar:

Follow the assembly instructions for the towball section carefully.

The towball section must be locked with the key before setting off.

Check that the indicator window shows green.

Important checks

The towball section's towball must be cleaned and greased regularly.

NOTE

If a towball hitch with vibration damper is used, it is not necessary to grease the tow- ball.

Storing the towball section

G 03

11 21

Towball section storage location

IMPORTANT

Always remove the towball section after use and store it in the appointed location in the car, firmly fastened with its strap.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 209

henrikrosenqvist

05 During your journey

Driving with a trailer

05

210

Specifications

G 02

14 85

G 02

14 83

G 02

14 84

Dimensions, mounting points (mm)

1 1127

2 93

3 855

4 428

5 112

6 360

7 Side member

8 Ball centre

Installing the towball

G 01

89 28

Remove the protective cover by first press-

ing in the catch and then pulling the

cover straight back .

G 02

14 87

Ensure that the mechanism is in the

unlocked position by turning the key clock-

wise.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 210

henrikrosenqvist

05 During your journey

Driving with a trailer

05

211

G 02

14 88

The indicator window must show red.

G 02

14 89

Insert the towball section until you hear a

click.

G 02

14 90

The indicator window must show green.

G 00

00 00

Turn the key anticlockwise to locked posi-

tion. Remove the key from the lock.

G 02

14 94

Check that the towball section is secure by

pulling it up, down and back.

WARNING

If the towball section is not fitted correctly then it must be removed and refitted in accordance with the previous instructions.

IMPORTANT

Only grease in the ball for the towing hitch, the remainder of the towball section should be clean and dry.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 211

henrikrosenqvist

05 During your journey

Driving with a trailer

05

212

G 02

14 95

Safety cable.

WARNING

Be sure to attach the trailer's safety cable to the correct place.

Removing the towball

G 02

14 96

Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the

unlocked position. G

02 14

97

Push in the locking wheel and turn it

anticlockwise until you hear a click.

G 02

14 98

Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it

comes to a stop. Hold it in this position

while pulling the towball rearward and

upward.

WARNING

Secure the towbar's loose towball safely if it is stored in the car, see page 209.

G 01

89 29

Push the protective cover until it snaps

tight.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 212

henrikrosenqvist

05 During your journey

Towing and recovery

05

213

Towing

Find out the highest legal speed for towing

before towing the car.

1. Press the remote control key into the igni-

tion switch to unlock the steering lock so

that the car can be steered, see page 96.

2. The remote control key must remain in the

ignition switch while the car is being towed.

3. Ensure the towrope is always taut by gently

depressing the brake pedal to avoid violent

jerks.

4. Be prepared to brake to stop.

WARNING

Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch to unlock the steering lock (so that the car can be steered) before towing.

WARNING

The steering lock stays in the position it was in when the power was cut off. The steering lock must be unlocked before towing. The ignition must be in position II. Never remove the remote control key from the ignition switch while driving or when the car is being towed.

WARNING

The brake servo and power steering do not work when the engine is switched off. The brake pedal must be pressed about five times harder than normal, and the steering will be considerably heavier than normal.

Manual gearbox Move gear lever into neutral and release

the parking brake.

Automatic gearbox Move the gear selector to position N and

release the parking brake.

IMPORTANT

Note that the car must always be towed with the wheels rolling forward.

Cars with automatic gearbox must not be towed at speeds above 80 km/h or further than 80 km.

Jump starting Do not tow the car to bump start it. Use a donor

battery if the battery is discharged to the extent

that the engine does not start, see page 99.

IMPORTANT

Bump starting the car can damage the cat- alytic converter.

Towing eye

Use the towing eye if the car needs to be towed

on the road. The towing eye is attached in the

recess on the right-hand side of the front or

rear bumper.

After use, unscrew the towing eye and return it

into the cargo area.

Fitting the towing eye

G 02

15 00

Take out the towing eye that is located

under the floor hatch in the cargo area.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 213

henrikrosenqvist

05 During your journey

Towing and recovery

05

214

G 02

15 01

Release the bottom edge of the cover on

the bumper with a screwdriver or coin.

Screw in the towing eye firmly, right in up

to the flange. Use the wheel wrench to

tighten the towing eye.

NOTE

On certain cars with fitted towbar the towing eye cannot be secured in the rear mounting. In which case, secure the tow rope in the towbar.

For this reason it is advisable to store a detachable towbar towball in the car.

Recovery

IMPORTANT

Note that the car must always be towed with the wheels rolling forward.

An all-wheel drive car (AWD) with raised front suspension must not be towed at speeds above 70 km/h. It should not be towed further than 50 km.

WARNING

The towing eye is only designed for towing on roads - not for recovering the car. Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 214

henrikrosenqvist

05 During your journey

05

215

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 215

henrikrosenqvist

G 02

09 22

216

Engine compartment............................................................................. 218

Lamps................................................................................................... 223

Wiper blades and washer fluid.............................................................. 230

Battery................................................................................................... 232

Fuses..................................................................................................... 235

Wheels and tyres................................................................................... 244

Car care................................................................................................. 259

Type designations................................................................................. 263

Specifications........................................................................................ 265

Type approval....................................................................................... 277

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 216

henrikrosenqvist

06 MAINTENANCE AND SPECIF ICATIONS

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 217

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Engine compartment

06

218

General

Volvo service programme To keep the car as safe and reliable as possi-

ble, follow the Volvo service programme as

specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Have an authorised Volvo workshop carry out

service and maintenance work. Volvo work-

shops have the personnel, special tools and

service literature to guarantee the highest qual-

ity of service.

IMPORTANT

For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and follow the instructions in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Check regularly Check the following oils and fluids at regular

intervals, e.g. when refuelling:

Coolant

Engine oil

Power steering fluid

Washer fluid

WARNING

Bear in mind that the radiator fan may start automatically some time after the engine has been switched off.

Always have the engine cleaned by a work- shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.

Opening and closing the bonnet

G 02

15 02

G 01

09 51

Pull the handle by the pedals. You will hear

when the catch releases.

Move the catch to the left and open the

bonnet. (The catch hook is located

between the headlamp and grille, see illus-

tration.)

WARNING

Check that the bonnet locks properly when closed.

Engine compartment, overview

G 01

89 45

The appearance of the engine compartment may vary depending on engine variant.

Coolant expansion tank

Power steering fluid reservoir

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 218

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Engine compartment

06

219

Engine oil dipstick

Radiator

Filler opening for engine oil

Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand

drive)

Battery

Relay and fuse box, engine compartment

Filling washer fluid

Air filter.

WARNING

High voltage output from the ignition sys- tem. The voltage in the ignition system is highly dangerous. The remote control key must therefore always be in position 0 dur- ing work in the engine compartment, see page 70.

Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coils when the remote control key is in ignition position II or when the engine is hot.

Checking the engine oil

G 02

17 33

Decal for oil grade.

Volvo recommends Castrol oil products. When

driving under adverse conditions, see

page 269.

IMPORTANT

In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact. An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil (see the engine compartment decal) for both filling and oil change, otherwise you will risk affecting service life, starting cha- racteristics, fuel consumption and environ- mental impact. Volvo Car Corporation dis- claims all warranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used.

Volvo uses different systems for warning of low

oil level or low oil pressure. Certain variants

have an oil pressure sensor, and then the lamp

for oil pressure is used. Other variants have an

oil level sensor, and then the driver is informed

via the warning symbol in the centre of the

instrument unit as well as by display texts. Cer-

tain models have both variants. Contact a

Volvo dealer for more information.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 219

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Engine compartment

06

220

Filling and dipstick

G 02

17 34

Petrol engine.

G 02

17 36

Diesel engine.

Change in accordance with the intervals speci-

fied in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

IMPORTANT

When filling oil to top up, the oil being filled must have the same grade, see page 269.

Checking the oil level in a new car is especially

important before the first scheduled oil change.

The most accurate measurements are made on

a cold engine before starting. The measure-

ment will be inaccurate if taken immediately

after the engine is switched off. The dipstick

will indicate that the level is too low because

the oil has not had time to flow down into the

oil sump.

G 02

17 37

The oil level must be within the area marked on the dipstick.

Park the car on a level surface, switch off the

engine and wait 10-15 minutes to allow the oil

time to run back to the sump. For capacities,

see page 269 and onwards.

Checking with a cold engine 1. Wipe the dipstick clean.

2. Check the level using the dipstick. It must

be between the MIN and MAX marks.

3. If the level is close to the MIN mark, start

by topping up with 0.5 litres of oil. Top up

until the level is nearer to MAX than MIN

on the dipstick.

IMPORTANT

Never fill above the MAX mark. Oil con- sumption may increase if too much oil is poured into the engine.

WARNING

Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire.

Checking with a warm engine 1. Wipe the dipstick clean.

2. Check the oil level using the dipstick.

3. If the level is close to the MIN mark, start

by topping up with 0.5 litres of oil. Top up

until the level is nearer to MAX than MIN

on the dipstick.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 220

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Engine compartment

06

221

Coolant

Checking and topping up the coolant

G 02

17 38

When topping up the coolant, follow the

instructions on the packaging. It is important

that the mixture of coolant concentrate and

water is correct for the prevailing weather con-

ditions. Never top up with water only. The risk

of freezing increases with both too little and too

much coolant concentrate. For capacities, see

page 272.

IMPORTANT

A high content of chlorine, chlorides and other salts may cause corrosion in the cooling system.

Always use coolant with anti-corrosion agent as recommended by Volvo.

Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50% water and 50% coolant.

Mix the coolant with approved quality tap water. In the event of any doubt about water quality, used ready-mixed coolant in accordance with Volvo rec- ommendations.

When changing coolant/replacing cool- ing system components, flush the cool- ing system clean with approved quality tap water or flush with ready-mixed coolant.

The engine must only be run with a well- filled cooling system. High tempera- tures can occur, causing a risk of damage (cracks) to the cylinder head.

For capacities and for standards regarding

water quality, see page 272.

Check the coolant regularly The level must lie between the MIN and MAX

marks on the expansion tank. If the system is

not filled sufficiently, high temperatures could

occur, causing a risk of damage to the engine.

WARNING

Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant requires topping up when the engine is at operating temperature, unscrew the expan- sion tank cap slowly to gently release the overpressure.

Brake and clutch fluid

Checking the level Brake and clutch fluid have a common reser-

voir. The level must be between the MIN and

MAX marks that are visible inside the reservoir.

Check the level regularly.

Change the brake fluid every other year or at

every other regular service.

For capacities and recommended fluid grade,

see page 272. The fluid should be changed

annually on cars driven in conditions requiring

hard, frequent braking, such as driving in

mountains or tropical climates with high

humidity.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 221

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Engine compartment

06

222

WARNING

If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid. The rea- son for the loss of brake fluid must be inves- tigated by an authorised Volvo workshop.

Filling

G 01

89 39

The fluid reservoir is located on the driver's side

The fluid reservoir is protected under the cover

over the cold section in the engine compart-

ment. The round cover must be removed first

before the reservoir cap can be reached.

1. Turn and open the cover located on the

covering.

2. Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid.

The level must be between the MIN and

MAX marks, which are located on the

inside of the reservoir.

IMPORTANT

Remember to close the cap.

Power steering fluid

G 02

17 40

IMPORTANT

Keep the area around the power steering fluid reservoir clean when checking.

Check the level frequently. The fluid does not

require changing. The fluid level must be

between the MIN and MAX marks. For capaci-

ties and recommended fluid grade, see

page 272.

NOTE

If a fault should arise in the power steering system or if the engine is switched off and the car must be towed, it can still be steered.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 222

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Lamps

06

223

General

All bulb specifications are given on page 229.

The following list contains bulbs and point-

source lamps that are specialised or unsuitable

for changing except at a workshop:

General interior lighting in the roof

Reading lamps

Glovebox lighting

Direction indicators, door mirror

Approach lighting, door mirror

Brake lights

Active Bi-Xenon , Bi-Xenon and LED lamps

WARNING

On cars with Bi-Xenon and Active Bi-Xenon headlamps, Xenon lamp replacement must be carried out at an authorised Volvo work- shop. The headlamps must be handled with extreme care due to the Xenon lamp's high- voltage unit.

IMPORTANT

Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with your fingers. Grease and oils from your fin- gers are vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector and then causing damage.

Front lamp housing

G 01

04 79

G 01

03 25

All front bulbs (except those for fog lamps) are

replaced by first removing the whole lamp

housing from the engine compartment.

WARNING

Always switch off the ignition and remove the remote control key before starting to replace a bulb.

Removing the headlamp 1.

ton and remove the remote control key.

2. (Upper illustration)

Withdraw the lamp housing's locking

pins.

Pull the lamp housing straight forward.

IMPORTANT

Do not pull the electrical cable, only the con- nector

3. (Lower illustration)

Detach the lamp housing connector by

pressing down the clip with your thumb.

At the same time, guide out the con-

nector with your other hand.

4. Lift out the lamp housing and place it on a

soft surface to avoid scratching the lens.

5. Replace the bulb in question, see

page 229.

Installing the headlamp 1. Plug in the connector, a clicking sound

should be heard.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 223

henrikrosenqvist

Press quickly on the START-/STOP but-

06 Maintenance and specifications

Lamps

06

224

2. Reinstall the lamp housing and locking

pins. Check that they are correctly

inserted.

3. Check the lighting.

The lamp housing must be plugged in and

installed before the lighting is switched on or

the remote control key is inserted into the igni-

tion switch.

Removing the cover

G 02

17 45

Before starting to replace a bulb, see

page 223.

1. Open the lock clamp by pressing up/out.

2. Press down the clips on the cover and

remove it.

Reinstall the cover in reverse order.

Dipped beam, halogen

G 02

17 46

1. Detach the headlamp.

2. Remove the cover.

3. Detach the bulb by pressing the holder

downwards.

4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.

5. Fit the new bulb in the socket and snap it

in. It can only be secured in one position.

Reinstall the parts in reverse order.

Main beam, Halogen

G 02

17 47

1. Detach the headlamp.

2. Remove the cover.

3. Detach the bulb by turning anticlockwise.

4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.

5. Replace the bulb and align it in the socket

and turn clockwise in order to secure it. It

can only be secured in one position.

Reinstall the parts in reverse order.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 224

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Lamps

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 225

Extra main beam Active Bi-Xenon and

Bi-Xenon *

G 02

17 48

1. Detach the headlamp.

2. Remove the cover, see page 224.

3. Detach the bulb by pressing the holder

downwards.

4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.

5. Fit the new bulb in the socket and snap it

in. It can only be secured in one position.

Reinstall the parts in reverse order.

Position/parking lamps

G 02

17 49

1. Detach the headlamp.

2. Remove the cover, see page 224.

3. For better access, detach the main beam

bulb first.

4. Pull the cable in order to withdraw the bulb

holder.

5. Remove the blown bulb and fit a new one.

It can only be secured in one position.

6. Fit the bulb holder in the socket and press

until a clicking sound is heard.

Reinstall the parts in reverse order.

Direction indicators/flashers

G 02

17 50

1. Detach the headlamp.

2. Remove the small round cover.

3. Pull the bulb holder in order to extract the

bulb.

4. Remove the blown bulb and fit a new one.

It can only be installed in one way.

5. Fit the bulb holder in the socket and press

until a clicking sound is heard.

6. Refit the cover. It must be fitted and

pressed in until a clicking sound is heard.

Reinstall the parts in reverse order.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 225

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Lamps

06

226

Side marker lamps

G 02

17 51

Before starting to replace a bulb, see

page 223.

1. Detach the headlamp.

2. Remove the small round cover.

3. Pull the cable in order to withdraw the bulb

holder.

4. Remove the blown bulb and fit a new one.

It can only be installed in one way.

5. Fit the bulb holder in the socket and press

until a clicking sound is heard.

6. Refit the cover. It must be fitted and

pressed in until a clicking sound is heard.

Reinstall the parts in reverse order.

Front fog lamps

G 02

17 53

1. Remove the cover by pressing in the 4 clips

with a thin blade and pulling straight out.

2. Unscrew the lamp housing screw and pull

it out.

3. Turn the bulb anticlockwise and remove it.

4. Fit a new bulb by turning clockwise.

5. Refit the bulb. (The profile of the bulb

holder corresponds to the profile of the

foot of the bulb.)

6. Refit the bulb holder. The TOP mark on the

bulb holder must always be upward.

Lamp housing, rear

G 02

17 54

The bulbs in the rear light cluster are replaced

from inside the cargo area (not the LED lamps).

1. Remove the covers in the left/right-hand

panel to access the bulbs. The bulbs are

located in separate bulb holders.

2. Press the catches together and pull out the

bulb holder.

3. Replace the bulb.

4. Plug in the connector.

5. Press the bulb holder into place and refit

the cover.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 226

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Lamps

06

227

NOTE

If an error message remains after a faulty bulb has been replaced, contact an author- ised Volvo workshop.

Location of rear bulbs

G 02

17 55

Lamp lens, right-hand side

Position/parking lights (LED)

Direction indicators

Side position lights, SML (LED)

Brake lights

Rear fog lamp (one side)

Reversing lamp

G 01

54 18

Rear lamp bulb holder

Direction indicators

Brake lights

Rear fog lamp (one side)

Reversing lamp

Number plate lighting

G 02

17 56

1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver.

2. Carefully detach the entire lamp housing

and withdraw it.

3. Replace the bulb.

4. Refit the entire lamp housing and screw it

into place.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 227

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Lamps

06

228

Courtesy lighting

G 02

17 57

Before starting to replace a bulb, see

page 223.

1. Insert a screwdriver at the short end of the

lens closest to the tunnel console and turn

gently so that the lens comes loose.

(Applies to both lamps).

2. Turn carefully until the lens comes loose.

3. Replace the bulb.

4. Refit the lens.

Lighting, cargo area

G 02

17 58

1. Insert a screwdriver and gently prize so

that the lamp housing comes loose.

2. Replace the bulb.

3. Check that the bulb illuminates and press

back the lamp housing.

Vanity mirror lighting

Removing the mirror glass

G 02

17 59

1. Insert a screwdriver underneath the lower

edge, in the centre. Carefully prize up the

lug on the edge.

2. Insert the screwdriver underneath the edge

on the left and right-hand sides (by the

black rubber sections), and prize carefully

so that the glass comes loose in the lower

edge.

3. Carefully detach and lift aside the entire

mirror glass and cover.

4. Replace the bulb.

Fitting the mirror glass 1. Press the three lugs at top edge of the mir-

ror glass back into position.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 228

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Lamps

06

229

2. Then press the three lower lugs back into

position.

Specification, bulbs

Lighting Out- put (W)

Type

Extra main beam,

Bi Xenon , ABL

55 H7

Dipped beam, hal-

ogen

55 H7

Main beam, Halo-

gen

65 H9

Brake lights 21 P21W

Reversing lamp 21 P21W

Rear fog lamp 21 P21W

Front direction

indicators

21 H21W

Direction indica-

tors, rear/

21 PY21W

Front fog lamps 35 H8

Lighting Out- put (W)

Type

Courtesy lighting,

cargo area light-

ing, number plate

lighting

5 Tubular

lamp SV8.5

Vanity mirror 1.2 Tubular

lamp SV5.5

Front position and

parking lamps

5 W5W

Front side marker

lamps

5 W5W

Glovebox lighting 5 Tubular

lamp SV8.5

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 229

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wiper blades and washer fluid

06

230

Wiper blades

Service position The wiper blades must be in service position to

facilitate replacement or washing.

1. Turn the remote control key to position 0,

see page 70, and keep the remote control

key in the ignition switch.

2. Move the right-hand stalk switch up for

about 1 second. The wipers then move to

standing straight up.

The wipers return to the starting position when

the car is started.

Replacing the wiper blades

G 02

17 60

G 02

17 61

G 02

17 62

Turn up the wiper arm. Press the button

located on the wiper blade mounting and

pull straight out parallel with the wiper arm.

Slide in the new wiper blade until a "click"

is heard.

Check that the blade is firmly installed.

G 02

17 63

NOTE

The wiper blades are different lengths. The blade on the driver's side is longer than the blade on the passenger side.

Cleaning For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen, see

page 259.

IMPORTANT

Check the wiper blades regularly. Neglected maintenance shortens the serv- ice life of the wiper blades.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 230

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wiper blades and washer fluid

06

231

Filling washer fluid

G 02

17 64

The windscreen and headlamp washers share

a common reservoir.

IMPORTANT

Add washer antifreeze during the winter so that the fluid does not freeze in the pump, reservoir and hoses.

For capacities, see page 272.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 231

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Battery

06

232

Warning symbols on the battery

Further information in the

owner's manual.

Store the battery out of

the reach of children.

The battery contains cor-

rosive acid.

Avoid sparks and naked

flames.

Risk of explosion.

NOTE

An expended battery must be recycled in an environmentally responsible manner - it contains lead.

Operation

Check that the cables to the battery are correctly connected and properly tight- ened.

Never disconnect the battery when the engine is running.

The service life and function of the battery is

influenced by factors such as the number of

starts, discharging, driving style, driving con-

ditions, climatic conditions etc.

IMPORTANT

Never use a quick charger to charge the battery.

WARNING

Batteries can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. One spark, which can be generated if you connect jump leads incorrectly, is sufficient to make the battery explode. The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns. If sul- phuric acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes, seek medical attention immediately.

NOTE

The life of the battery is shortened if it becomes discharged repeatedly.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 232

henrikrosenqvist

Use protective goggles.

06 Maintenance and specifications

Battery

06

233

Changing

Removal

G 02

17 65

G 02

17 66

G 02

17 67

G 02

17 68

G 02

17 69

Switch off the ignition and wait for 5 minutes.

Open the clips on the front cover and

remove the cover.

Release the rubber moulding so that the

rear cover is free.

Remove the rear cover by screwing one

quarter turn and lifting it away.

WARNING

Connect and disconnect the positive and negative cables in the correct sequence.

Detach the black negative cable

Detach the red positive cable

Detach the ventilation hose from the bat-

tery

Loosen the screw holding the battery

clamp.

Move the battery to the side and lift it up.

Installation

G 02

17 71

1. Lower the battery into the battery box.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 233

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Battery

06

234

2. Move the battery inward and to the side

until it reaches the rear edge of the box.

3. Screw in the battery with the screw in the

clamp.

4. Connect the ventilation hose.

5. Connect the red positive cable.

6. Connect the black negative cable.

7. Press in the rear cover. (See Removal).

8. Reinstall the rubber moulding. (See

Removal).

9. Reinstall the front cover and secure it with

the clips. (See Removal).

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 234

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

06

235

General

All electrical functions and components are

protected by a number of fuses in order to pro-

tect the car's electrical system from damage by

short circuiting or overloading.

If an electrical component or function does not

work, it may be because the component's fuse

was temporarily overloaded and failed. If the

same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault

in the circuit. In which case, contact an author-

ised Volvo workshop to have the system

checked.

Changing 1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.

2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side

to see whether the curved wire has blown.

3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse

of the same colour and amperage.

WARNING

Never use a foreign object, or a fuse with an amperage higher than that specified when replacing a fuse. This could cause signifi- cant damage to the electrical system and possibly lead to fire.

Location, fuse boxes

G 02

17 72

If the car is right-hand drive, the fuse boxes

change to under the glovebox and the side of

the centre console.

Under the glovebox

Engine compartment

Cargo area

By centre console*

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 235

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

06

236

Engine compartment

G 02

56 00

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 236

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 237

General fuses, engine compartment On the inside of the cover are tweezers that

facilitate the removal and fitting of fuses.

Positions (see preceding illustration) Engine compartment, upper

Engine compartment, front

Engine compartment, lower

These fuses are all located in the engine com-

partment box. Fuses in are located under

.

Fuses 1 7 and 42 44 are of the "Midi Fuse" type and must only be replaced by an authorised Volvo workshop.

8 15 and 34 are of the "JCASE" type and must only be replaced by an authorised Volvo workshop.

16 33 and 35 41 are of the "MiniFuse" type.

Pos Function A

Primary fuse CEM KL30A 50

Primary fuse CEM KL30B 50

Primary fuse RJBA KL30 60

Primary fuse RJBB KL30 60

Pos Function A

Primary fuse RJBD KL30 50

Reserve

PTC Air preheater* 100

Reserve

Windscreen wipers 30

Parking heater* 25

Ventilation fan 40

Reserve

ABS pump 40

ABS valves 20

Reserve

Headlamp levelling*

(Active Bi-Xenon , Bi-

Xenon )

10

Primary fuse CEM 20

Radar, ACC control mod-

ule*

5

Pos Function A

Speed related power

steering

5

Engine Control Module

(ECM), transm. SRS

10

Heated washer nozzles 10

Vacuum pump I5T 20

Lighting panel 5

Headlamp washers 15

12 V socket, front and rear

seat

15

Sunroof*, Roof console/

ECC*

5

Relay, engine compart-

ment box

5

Auxiliary lamps* 20

Horn 15

Engine Control Module

(ECM)

10

Control module, auto-

matic gearbox*

15

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 237

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

06

238

Pos Function A

Compressor A/C 15

Relay coils 5

Starter motor relay 30

Ignition coils 20

Glow system (5-cyl. die-

sel)

10

EGR, VTC, Bypass engine

cooling system (4-cyl. die-

sel)

10

Engine control module,

Throttle petrol

10

Engine control module,

Throttle diesel

15

Injection system, Mass air

flow sensor

15

Mass air flow sensor (4-

cyl. diesel)

10

Engine valves 10

Pos Function A

EVAP, Lambda-sond,

Injection (petrol)

15

Lambda-sond (4-cyl. pet-

rol, 5-cyl. diesel)

10

Water pump (V8) 10

Crankcase ventilation

heater (5-cyl. petrol)

10

Diesel filter heater, crank-

case ventilation heater (4-

cyl. diesel)

15

Diesel filter heater, crank-

case ventilation heater (5-

cyl. diesel)

20

Not used 5

Glow plugs (4-cyl. diesel) 60

Glow plugs (5-cyl. diesel) 70

Reserve

Cooling fan (4 5-cyl. pet-

rol, 4-cyl. diesel)

60

Cooling fan (V8, 6-cyl. pet-

rol, 5-cyl diesel)

80

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 238

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 239

Under the glovebox

10 11 12 13 141 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

232221201918171615 24 25 26 27 28

G 03

29 18

1. Fold aside the interior trim covering the

fuse box.

2. Press the cover's lock and fold it up.

3. The fuses are accessible.

Positions

Pos Function A

Rain sensor* 5

SRS system 10

ABS brakes, electric park-

ing brake

5

Pos Function A

Accelerator pedal*, air

heater (PTC), heated

seats*

7,5

Reserve

ICM display, CD & Radio A,

RSE system*

15

Steering wheel module 7,5

Reserve

Pos Function A

Main beam 15

Sunroof* 20

Reversing lamps 7,5

Reserve

Fog lamp, front* 15

Windscreen washers 15

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 239

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

06

240 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Pos Function A

Adaptive cruise control,

ACC*

10

Reserve

Roof lighting, control panel

driver's door/Power pas-

senger seat*

7,5

Information display 5

Power driver's seat* 5

Reserve

Remote control key

receiver, alarm sensors

5

Fuel pump 20

Electric steering lock 20

Reserve

Lock, tank/boot lid 10

Alarm siren, ECC 5

Pos Function A

Start/stop button 5

Brake light switch 5

A Premium.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 240

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 241

In centre console - Executive*

G 03

15 31

The fuse box is located behind the cover panel

on the passenger side.

NOTE

The car should be taken to an authorised Volvo workshop for any replacement of fuses.

Pos Function A

Analogue clock 5

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 241

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

06

242 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Cargo area

G 03

29 20

The fuse box is located behind the upholstery

on the left-hand side.

Positions

Pos Module (black).

Function

A

Control panel, driver's door 25

Control panel, passenger

door

25

Control panel, rear door, left 25

Pos Module (black).

Function

A

Control panel, rear door,

right

25

Reserve

12 V socket cargo area,

refrigerator*

15

Rear window defroster 30

Folding head restraints* 15

Pos Module (black).

Function

A

Trailer socket 2* 15

Power seat driver's side 25

Trailer socket 1* 40

Reserve

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 242

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 243

Pos Module (white).

Function

A

Massage seat front, Armrest

lighting, Refrigerator*

5

Control module Four C* 15

Seat heating, driver's side

front*

15

Seat heating, passenger

side front*

15

Seat heating right rear* 15

AWD control module 10

Seat heating left rear* 15

Reserve

Power seat passenger side* 25

Keyless drive* 20

Electric parking brake*, left 30

Electric parking brake*, right 30

Pos Module (blue). Func-

tion

A

Display RTI*, parking cam-

era*

10

Reserve

Reserve

Reserve

Audio amplifier* 25

Audio system A 15

Phone, Bluetooth* 5

-

Reserve

A High Performance and Premium.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 243

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tyres

06

244

General

Tyres greatly affect the car's driving characte-

ristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pres-

sure and speed rating are important for how the

car performs.

Direction of rotation

G 02

17 78

The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.

Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed

to only turn in one direction have the direction

of rotation marked with an arrow. The tyre must

always rotate in the same direction throughout

its lifespan. Tyres should only be switched

between front and rear positions, never

between left and right-hand sides, or vice

versa. If the tyre is mounted incorrectly, the

car's braking characteristics and capacity to

force rain and slush out of the way are

adversely affected.

NOTE

Ensure that tyres of the same type and dimensions, and also the same make, are fitted to all four wheels.

Follow the recommended tyre pressures

specified in the tyre pressure table, see

page 255.

Tyre care

Tyre age All tyres older than 6 years old should be

checked by an expert even if they seem

undamaged. Tyres age and decompose, even

if they are hardly ever or never used. The func-

tion can therefore be affected. This also applies

to spare tyres, winter tyres and tyres saved for

future use. Examples of external signs which

indicate that the tyre is unsuitable for use are

cracks or discoloration.

New tyres

G 02

18 23

Tyres are perishable. After a few years they

begin to harden at the same time as the friction

capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate.

For this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as

possible when you replace them. This is espe-

cially important with regard to winter tyres. The

week and year of manufacture, the tyre's DOT

marking (Department of Transportation), are

stated with four digits, for example 1502. The

tyre in the illustration was manufactured in

week 15 of 2002.

Summer and winter tyres When summer and winter wheels are changed

the wheels should be marked with which side

of the car they were mounted on, for example

L for left and R for right.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 244

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tyres

06

245

Wear and maintenance The correct tyre pressure results in more even

wear, see page 254. Driving style, tyre pres-

sure, climate and road condition affect how

quickly your tyres age and wear. To avoid dif-

ferences in tread depth and to prevent wear

patterns arising, the front and rear wheels can

be switched with each other. A suitable dis-

tance for the first change is approx. 5000 km

and then at 10 000 km intervals. Contact an

authorised Volvo workshop if you are uncertain

about tread depth.

Wheels should be stored lying down or hanging

up - and not standing up.

WARNING

A damaged tyre can lead to loss of control of the car.

Tyres with tread wear indicators

G 02

18 29

Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless

bands across the width of the tread. On the

side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread Wear

Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth is down

to 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be level in height

with the tread wear indicators. Change to new

tyres as soon as possible. Remember that

tyres with little tread depth provide very poor

grip in rain and snow.

Rims and wheel bolts

IMPORTANT

The wheel bolts must be tightened to 140 Nm. Overtightening can damage the nuts and the bolts.

Only use rims that are tested and approved by

Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accesso-

ries. Check the torque with a torque wrench.

Locking wheel bolts Locking wheel bolts can be used on both alu-

minium and steel rims.

Winter tyres

Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular

dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent

on engine variant. When driving on winter tyres,

the correct tyres must be fitted to all four

wheels.

NOTE

Ask a Volvo dealer which rim and tyre types are most suitable.

Studded tyres Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for

500-1000 km so the studs settle properly into

the tyres. This gives the tyre, and especially the

studs, a longer service life.

NOTE

The legal provisions for the use of studded tyres vary from country to country.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 245

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tyres

06

246 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Tread depth Road conditions with ice, slush and low tem-

peratures place considerably higher demands

on tyres than summer conditions. Volvo there-

fore recommends not to drive on winter tyres

that have a tread depth of less than 4 millime-

tres.

Using snow chains

Snow chains may only be used on the front

wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars).

Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snow

chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this

wears out both the snow chains and tyres.

Never use quick-fit snow chains as the space

between the brake discs and the wheels is too

small.

IMPORTANT

Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva- lent chains designed for the car model, and tyre and rim dimensions. Consult an author- ised Volvo workshop

Tyre pressure monitoring, TPMS*

TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System)

warns the driver when the pressure is too low

in one or more of the car's tyres. It uses sensors

located inside the air valve in each wheel.

When the car is driven at about 40 km/h the

system detects the tyre pressure. If the pres-

sure is too low then a warning lamp on the

instrument panel illuminates and a message is

shown on the display.

Always check the system after changing a

wheel in order to ensure that replacement

wheels work with the system.

For information on correct tyre pressure, see

page 254.

The system does not replace normal tyre main-

tenance.

IMPORTANT

If a fault should arise in the tyre pressure system a warning lamp on the instrument panel will illuminate. The message TYRE PRESS. SYST SERVICE REQUIRED will be shown. This can be for various reasons, e.g. fitting a wheel not equipped with a sen- sor adapted for Volvo's tyre pressure moni- toring system.

Adjusting tyre pressure monitoring Tyre pressure monitoring can be adjusted in

order to follow Volvo's tyre pressure recom-

mendations, when driving with a heavy load for

example.

NOTE

The engine must not be running.

Settings are made in the controls in the centre

console, see page 116.

1. Inflate the tyres to the required pressure

and select key position I or II.

2. Select Car settings Tyre pressure

3. Select Calibrate tyre pressure.

4. Press ENTER.

5. Drive the car at least at 40 km/h in total for

at least 1 minute.

Rectifying low tyre pressure When the message LOW TYRE PRESS

CHECK TYRES is shown on the display

1. Check the tyre pressure in all four tyres.

2. Inflate the tyre(s) to the correct pressure.

3. Drive the car at least at 40 km/h in total for

at least 1 minute and check that the mes-

sage disappears.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 246

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tyres

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 247

Deactivating/activating tyre pressure

monitoring

NOTE

The engine must not be running.

Settings are made in the controls in the centre

console, see page 116.

1. Select key position I or II.

2. Select Car settings Tyre pressure

3. Select Tyre pressure system and press

ENTER.

> A X is shown in the display if the system

is activated, the option disappears if the

system is deactivated.

Recommendations Only factory fitted wheels are equipped with

TPMS sensors in the valves.

The temporary spare wheel does not have this sensor.

If wheels without TPMS sensors are used then TYRE PRESS SYST SERVICE REQUIRED will be shown every time the car is driven faster than 40 km/h for more than 10 minutes.

Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors are fitted to all wheels on the car.

Volvo recommends that sensors are not moved between different wheels.

WARNING

When inflating a tyre equipped with TPMS, hold the nozzle of the pump directly against the valve to avoid damaging the valve.

Driveable punctured tyres*

If Self Supporting run flat Tyres (SST) have

been selected then the car is also equipped

with TPMS.

This type of tyre has a specially reinforced side

wall that makes continued driving possible

despite the tyre losing some air. These tyres

are fitted on a special rim. (Normal tyres can

also be fitted to this rim).

If an SST tyre loses tyre pressure then the yel-

low TPMS lamp on the instrument panel illu-

minates and a message is shown in the text

panel. If this occurs, reduce speed to

max. 80 km/h. The tyre must be replaced as

soon as possible.

Drive carefully, in some cases it can be difficult

to see which tyre is faulty. In order to establish

which tyre needs attention, check all four tyres.

WARNING

SST tyres should only be fitted by individu- als with expertise on SST tyres.

SST tyres must only be fitted together with TPMS.

After a fault message on low tyre pressure has been shown, do not drive faster than 80 km/h.

Maximum driving distance to tyre change is 80 km.

Avoid hard driving.

SST tyres must be replaced if they are dam- aged or punctured.

Tools

G 01

43 41

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 247

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tyres

06

248 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

A foam block, located in the spare wheel rim,

contains all tools. The tools consist of a towing

eye, jack* and wheel wrench. The foam block

is screwed into a bracket in the bottom of the

spare wheel well.

Jack* The original jack should only be used for

changing wheels. The jack's thread must

always be well greased.

Spare wheel*

The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is only

intended for temporary use. Replace the spare

wheel with a normal wheel as soon as possible.

The car's handling may be altered by the use

of the spare wheel. The correct tyre pressure

for the spare wheel is stated in the tyre pres-

sure table, see page 255.

IMPORTANT

Never drive faster than 80 km/h with a spare wheel on the car.

IMPORTANT

The car must never be driven fitted with more than one temporary spare wheel.

The spare wheel is located in the spare wheel

well with the outside down. Two foam blocks,

one under the spare wheel and one over/inside

affix the spare wheel in position. The upper one

contains all tools.

The same bolt runs through to secure the spare

wheel and the foam blocks.

Taking out the spare wheel 1. Fold the rear edge of the floor mat forward.

2. Undo the retaining screw.

3. Lift out the foam block with its tools.

4. Lift out the spare wheel.

The lower block does not need to be lifted out.

Tools - returning into place

G 02

93 36

The tools and jack must be returned to their

correct places after use. The jack must be

cranked to the correct position in order to have

space.

The foam block and spare wheel must be

replaced in the reverse order to taking out.

Note that there is an arrow on the upper foam

block. It must point forwards in the car.

IMPORTANT

Tools and jack must be stored in the intended location in the car's cargo area when not in use.

Changing wheels

Removing

G 01

74 65

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 248

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tyres

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 249

Set up the warning triangle, see page 207 if a

wheel must be replaced at a busy location. The

car and jack* must be on a firm horizontal sur-

face.

1. Apply the parking brake and engage first

gear, or position P if the car has an auto-

matic gearbox.

WARNING

Check that the jack is not damaged, that the threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is free from dirt.

NOTE

Use the jack belonging to the car.

2. Take out the spare wheel, jack and wheel

wrench that are located under the carpet in

the cargo area.

3. Place chocks in front of and behind the

wheels which will remain on the ground.

Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones.

G 02

17 79

4. (For cars with steel rims.) Prize off the

wheel cover with the end of the wheel

wrench, or pull it off by hand.

5. Loosen the wheel nuts 1 turn anticlock-

wise with the wheel wrench.

WARNING

Never position anything between the ground and the jack, nor between the jack- ing point and the jack.

6. There are two jacking points on each side

of the car. There is a recess in the plastic

cover at each point. Crank the foot of the

jack down so it is pressed squarely on the

ground. Check that the jack sits in the

anchorage as illustrated and that the foot

is positioned vertically under the anchor-

age.

7. Lift the car so that the wheel is free.

Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the

wheel.

Installation 1. Clean the contact surfaces on the wheel

and hub.

2. Put on the wheel. Screw in the wheel bolts.

3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot

rotate.

G 02

17 80

4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is

important that the wheel bolts are tight-

ened properly. Tighten to 140 Nm. Check

the torque with a torque wrench.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 249

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tyres

06

250 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

5. Fit on the wheel cover (for cars with steel

rims).

NOTE

The hubcap outlet for the valve must be located over the valve on the rim when fit- ted.

WARNING

Never crawl under the car when it is raised on the jack.

Passengers must leave the car when it is raised on the jack.

Park the car so that passengers have the car - or preferably a crash barrier - between them and the road.

Emergency puncture repair*

G 01

43 40

General The emergency puncture repair kit is used to

seal a puncture as well as to check and adjust

the tyre pressure. It consists of a compressor

and a bottle with sealing fluid. The kit works as

a temporary repair. The sealing fluid bottle

must be replaced before its expiration date and

after use.

The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punc-

tured in the tread.

NOTE

The emergency puncture repair kit is only intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in the tread.

The emergency puncture repair kit has limited

capacity to seal tyres which have punctures in

the wall. Do not seal tyres with the emergency

puncture repair kit if they have larger slits,

cracks or similar damage.

12 V sockets for the compressor are located by

the centre console in the front, by the rear seat

and in the cargo area. Choose the electrical

socket that is nearest the punctured tyre.

Taking out the emergency puncture

repair kit Set up the warning triangle adjacent to a traf-

ficked location. The emergency puncture

repair kit is located under the floor in the cargo

area.

1. Fold the rear edge of the floor mat forward.

2. Unscrew the retaining screw.

3. Lift away the foam block holding the jack

and wheel wrench.

4. Lift up the emergency puncture repair kit.

Replace the parts after use.

WARNING

You should not drive faster than 80 km/h after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used. The temporarily sealed tyre must be changed as soon as possible (maximum driving distance: 200 km).

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 250

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tyres

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 251

Overview

G 01

43 37

Label, maximum permitted speed

Switch

Cable

Bottle holder (orange cap)

Protective cap

Pressure reducing valve

Air hose

Sealing fluid bottle

Pressure gauge

Gloves*

Sealing punctured tyres

G 01

43 38

For information on the function of the parts, see preceding illustration.

1. Open the lid of the emergency puncture

repair kit.

2. Detach the decal for maximum permitted

speed and affix it to the steering wheel.

WARNING

The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In the case of contact with skin, wash away the fluid with soap and water.

3. Check that the switch is in position 0 and

locate the cable and the air hose.

NOTE

Do not break the bottle seal. The seal is bro- ken when the bottle is screwed in.

4. Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew the

bottle's stopper.

WARNING

Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.

5. Screw the bottle into its holder.

6. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw

in the air hose valve connection to the bot-

tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 251

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tyres

06

252

WARNING

Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running.

7. Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and

start the car.

WARNING

Never stand next to the tyre when the com- pressor is running. If cracks or unevenness arise then the compressor must be switched off immediately. The journey should not be continued. Contact an authorised tyre centre.

NOTE

When the compressor starts, the pressure can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure drops after approximately 30seconds.

8. Flick the switch to position I.

IMPORTANT

Risk of overheating. The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes.

9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.

WARNING

If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the hole in the tyre is too big. The journey should not be continued. Contact an authorised tyre centre.

10. Switch off the compressor to check the

pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum

pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum is

3.5 bar.

11. Switch off the compressor and unplug the

cable from the 12 V socket.

12. Detach the hose from the tyre valve and fit

the valve cap.

13. As soon as possible, drive approximately

3 km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h so

that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre.

Inflating the tyres The car's original tyres can be inflated by the

compressor.

1. The compressor must be switched off.

Make sure that the switch is in position 0

and locate the cable and air hose.

2. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw

in the air hose valve connection to the bot-

tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.

WARNING

Inhaling car exhaust fumes can result in danger to life. Never leave the engine run- ning in sealed areas or areas that lack suf- ficient ventilation.

WARNING

Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running.

3. Connect the cable to one of the car's 12 V

sockets and start the car.

4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch

to position I.

IMPORTANT

Risk of overheating. The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes.

5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified on

the tyre pressure decal, (release air using

the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pres-

sure is too high.)

6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air

hose and cable.

7. Refit the dust cap.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 252

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tyres

06

253

Rechecking the repair and pressure 1. Reconnect the equipment.

2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure

gauge.

If it is below 1.3 bar then the tyre is insufficiently sealed. The journey should not be continued. Contact a tyre centre.

If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar, the tyre must be inflated to the pressure specified on the tyre pressure decal. Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.

WARNING

Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.

3. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air

hose and cable. Refit the dust cap.

4. Return the emergency puncture repair kit

to the cargo area.

NOTE

The sealing fluid bottle and hose must be replaced after use. Replacement must be performed by an authorised Volvo work- shop.

WARNING

Check the tyre pressure regularly.

Drive to the nearest authorised Volvo work-

shop for the replacement/repair of the dam-

aged tyre. Advise the workshop that the tyre

contains sealing fluid.

WARNING

You should not drive faster than 80 km/h after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used. Contact an authorised Volvo work- shop for inspection of the sealed tyre (maxi- mum driving distance is 200 km). The staff there can determine whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.

Replacing the sealing fluid canister Replace the bottle when the expiration date

has passed. Treat the old bottle as environ-

mentally hazardous waste.

WARNING

The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natural rubber-latex.

Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic reaction in the event of skin contact.

Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.

Store out of the reach of children.

NOTE

Leave the container at a collection point for storing dangerous waste.

Specifications

Designation of dimensions The dimensions are stated on all car tyres.

Example of designation:

225/50R17 94 W.

225 Section width (mm)

50 Ratio between section height and

width (%)

R Radial ply

17 Rim diameter in inches (")

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 253

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tyres

06

254

94 Tyre load index

W Speed rating for maximum permitted

speed (in this case 270 km/h).

Speed ratings The car is approved as a whole, which means

that dimensions and speed ratings must not

differ from those specified on the car's regis-

tration document.

The only exception to these conditions is win-

ter tyres (both those with metal studs and those

without). If such a tyre is chosen, the car must

not be driven faster than the speed rating of the

tyre. (For example, class Q can be driven at a

maximum of 160 km/h).

Traffic regulations determine how fast a car

can be driven, not the speed rating of the tyres.

Q 160 km/h (used only on winter tyres)

T 190 km/h

H 210 km/h

V 240 km/h

W 270 km/h

Y 300 km/h

NOTE

It is the maximum permitted speed that is stated in the table.

Tyre pressure

G 02

18 30

The tyre pressure decal on the driver's side

door pillar (between front and rear door) shows

which pressures the tyres should have at dif-

ferent loads and speed conditions, this is also

specified in the tyre pressure table, see below.

Tyre pressure for the car's recommended wheel dimension

ECO pressure

Spare wheel pressure (Temporary Spare)

NOTE

Temperature differences change tyre pres- sure.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 254

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tyres

06

255

Recommended tyre pressure

Variant Tyre size Speed

(km/h)

Load, 1 3 persons

without TPMS

Load, 1 3 per-

sons

with TPMS

Max. load ECO pres- sure A

Front (kPa) B Rear (kPa)

Front/ rear (kPa)

Front (kPa)

Rear (kPa)

Front/rear (kPa)

8-cyl. 225/50 R 17 0 160 240 220 240 260 260 260

160 + 300 300 300 310 310 -

245/45 R 17 0 160 220 210 220 260 260 260

160 + 280 280 280 300 300 -

245/40 R 18 0 160 240 220 240 260 260 260

160 + 270 270 270 290 290 -

6-cyl. 225/55 R 16

225/50 R 17

245/45 R 17

0 160 230 210 230 260 260 260

160 + 280 280 280 290 290 -

245/40 R 18 0 160 230 210 230 260 260 260

160 + 270 270 270 290 290 -

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 255

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tyres

06

256

Variant Tyre size Speed

(km/h)

Load, 1 3 persons

without TPMS

Load, 1 3 per-

sons

with TPMS

Max. load ECO pres- sure A

Front (kPa) B Rear (kPa)

Front/ rear (kPa)

Front (kPa)

Rear (kPa)

Front/rear (kPa)

5-cyl. diesel

185 hp

225/55 R 16

225/50 R 17,

245/45 R 17

0 160 220 210 220 260 260 260

160 + 260 260 260 270 270 -

245/40 R 18 0 160 230 210 230 260 260 260

160 + 260 260 260 270 270 -

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 256

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tyres

06

257

Variant Tyre size Speed

(km/h)

Load, 1 3 persons

without TPMS

Load, 1 3 per-

sons

with TPMS

Max. load ECO pres- sure A

Front (kPa) B Rear (kPa)

Front/ rear (kPa)

Front (kPa)

Rear (kPa)

Front/rear (kPa)

4-cyl. diesel

5-cyl. diesel,

163 hp

4-cyl./5-cyl.

petrol

4-cyl./5-cyl.

Flexifuel

225/55 R 16

225/50 R 17

245/45 R 17

0 160 220 210 220 260 260 260

160 + 260 260 260 270 270 -

245/40 R 18

205/60 R 16

0 160 230 210 230 260 260 260

160 + 260 260 260 270 270 -

Spare wheel C T 125/80 R 17 max. 80 420 420 420 420 420 -

A Economical driving. B In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa. C Temporary spare.

Fuel economy, ECO pressure At speeds under 160 km/h, the general tyre

pressure for full load is recommended in order

to obtain optimum fuel economy.

Checking the tyre pressure The tyre pressures must be checked every

month. This also applies to the car's spare

wheel. After several few kilometres of driving,

the tyres warm up and the pressure increases.

Check tyre pressures on cold tyres. "Cold

tyres" means the tyres are the same tempera-

ture as the ambient temperature.

Inadequate tyre pressure increases fuel con-

sumption, shortens tyre lifespan and impairs

the car's roadholding. Driving on tyres with tyre

pressure that is too low could result in the tyres

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 257

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tyres

06

258

overheating and being damaged. Tyre pres-

sure affects travelling comfort, road noise and

steering characteristics.

NOTE

Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also varies depending on ambient temperature.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 258

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Car care

06

259

Washing the car

Wash the car as soon as it becomes dirty.

Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator.

Use car shampoo.

Remove bird droppings from the paintwork as soon as possible. Bird droppings con- tain chemicals that affect and discolour paintwork very quickly. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended for the removal of any discoloration.

Hose down the underbody. If using a pres- sure washer, keep the nozzle at least 30 cm from the painted surfaces.

Rinse the entire car to remove loose dirt. Do not spray directly onto the locks.

Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and plenty of lukewarm water.

Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo.

Use cold degreasing agent on very dirty surfaces.

Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or a water scraper.

WARNING

Always have the engine cleaned by a work- shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.

IMPORTANT

Dirty headlamps have impaired functional- ity. Clean them regularly, when refuelling for example.

NOTE

Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog lamps and rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens. This is a natural phenomenon, all outside lighting is designed to withstand this. Condensation is normally vented out of the lamp housing when it has been switched on for a time.

Cleaning the wiper blades Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades,

as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen,

impair the service life of wiper blades.

NOTE

Wash the wiper blades and windscreen reg- ularly with lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo.

Do not use any strong solvents.

Automatic car washes An automatic car wash is a simple and quick

way of washing the car, but it cannot reach

everywhere. Handwashing the car is recom-

mended for achieving optimum results.

NOTE

During the first few months a new car must only be handwashed. This is because the paintwork is more sensitive when it is new.

Testing the brakes

WARNING

Always test the brakes after washing the car, including the parking brake, to ensure that moisture and corrosion do not attack the brake linings and reduce braking per- formance.

Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then

when driving long distances in rain or slush.

The heat from the friction causes the brake lin-

ings to warm up and dry. Do the same thing

after starting in very damp or cold weather.

Exterior plastic, rubber and trim

components A special cleaning agent available from Volvo

dealers is recommended for cleaning coloured

plastic parts, rubber and trim components,

such as glossy trim mouldings. When using

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 259

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Car care

06

260 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

such a cleaning agent the instructions must be

followed carefully.

IMPORTANT

Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and rubber.

Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear away or damage the glossy surface.

Polishing agent that contains abrasive must not be used.

Rims Only use cleaning agent recommended by

Volvo. Strong rim cleaning agents can damage

the surface and cause stains on chrome-plated

aluminium rims.

Polishing and waxing

Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull

or to give the paintwork extra protection.

The car does not need to be polished until it is

at least one year old. However, the car can be

waxed during this time. Do not polish or wax

the car in direct sunlight.

Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you

begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt

and tar stains using Volvo tar remover or white

spirit. More stubborn stains can be removed

using fine rubbing paste designed for car paint-

work.

Polish first with a polish and then wax with liq-

uid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the

packaging carefully. Many preparations con-

tain both polish and wax.

IMPORTANT

Paint treatment such as preserving, sealing, protection, lustre sealing or similar could damage the paintwork. Paintwork damage caused by such treatments is not covered by Volvo warranty.

Cleaning front side windows that have a water-repellent surface*

Never use products such as car wax,

degreaser or similar on glass surfa-

ces as this could ruin their water-repellent

properties.

Take care when cleaning so as not to damage

the glass surface.

To avoid damaging glass surfaces when

removing ice only use plastic ice scrapers.

There is natural wear of the water-repellent

coating.

Treatment with a special finishing agent avail-

able from Volvo dealers is recommended in

order to maintain the water-repellent proper-

ties. This should be used first after three years

and then each year.

Rustproofing inspection and maintenance

The car received a thorough and complete

rustproofing at the factory. Parts of the body

are made of galvanised sheet metal. The

underbody is protected by a wear-resistant

anti-corrosion compound. A thin, penetrating

rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the

exposed members, cavities, closed sections

and side doors.

Under normal conditions the rustproofing does

not require treatment for approximately 12

years. After this period, it should be treated at

three-year intervals. Please contact an author-

ised Volvo workshop if the car needs further

treatment.

Dirt and road salt can lead to corrosion so it is

important to keep the car clean. The car's rust-

proofing needs to be checked regularly and

touched-up if necessary in order for it to be

maintained.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 260

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Car care

06

261

Cleaning the interior

Only use cleaning agents and car care prod-

ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly

and follow the instructions included with the

car care product.

Stains on fabric upholstery and roof

upholstery A special fabric cleaning agent, available from

authorised Volvo dealers, is recommended to

avoid impairing the fire retardant qualities of

the upholstery. Use water and a synthetic

detergent to clean the seatbelts. Make sure the

seatbelt is dry before allowing it to retract.

IMPORTANT

Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the fabric upholstery.

Treating stains on leather upholstery Volvo leather upholstery is chromium-free and

approved in accordance with the Oeko-Tex

100 standard.

The leather is refined and processed so that it

retains its natural characteristics. It is given a

protective coating, but regular cleaning is

required in order to maintain both characteris-

tics and appearance. Volvo offers a compre-

hensive product for the cleaning and treatment

of leather upholstery which, when used in

accordance with the instructions, preserves

the leather's protective coating. After a period

of use the natural appearance of the leather will

nevertheless emerge, depending more or less

on the surface texture of the leather. This is a

natural maturing of the leather and shows that

it is a natural product.

To achieve best results Volvo recommends

cleaning and application of the protective

cream once to four times per year (or more if

required). Ask a Volvo dealer about Volvo's

Leather care product.

IMPORTANT

Never use strong solvents. Such products may damage fabric, vinyl and leather upholstery.

IMPORTANT

Note that materials with colour that runs when dry (new jeans, suede garments etc.) may discolour the upholstery material.

Washing instructions for leather

upholstery 1. Pour the leather cleaner on the dampened

sponge and squeeze out a strong foam.

2. Work the dirt away with gentle circular

movements.

3. Dab accurately with the sponge on the

stains. Allow the sponge to absorb the

stain. Do not rub.

4. Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth and

allow the leather to dry completely.

Protective treatment of leather

upholstery 1. Pour a small amount of the protective

cream on the felted cloth and massage in

a thin layer of cream with gentle circular

movements on the leather.

2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes

before use.

The leather has now been given improved pro-

tection against stains and improved UV pro-

tection.

Treating stains on interior plastic, metal

and wood parts A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly

moistened with water, available from Volvo

dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior

parts and surfaces.

Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong

stain removers. A special cleaning agent avail-

able from Volvo dealers can be used for more

difficult cleaning.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 261

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Car care

06

262

Carpets and cargo area Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of

the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use a

vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt.

Touching up paintwork

Paint is an important part of the car's rust-

proofing and should therefore be checked reg-

ularly. To avoid the onset of rust, damaged

paintwork should be rectified immediately. The

most common types of paintwork damage are

stone chips, scratches, and marks on the

edges of wings and doors.

Materials

primer in a can

paint in a can or touch-up pen

brush

masking tape

Colour code

G 02

18 31

It is important that the exact correct colour is

used. The product decal specifies the car's

colour code, see page 263.

Repairing stone chips

G 02

18 32

Before work is begun, the car must be clean

and dry and at a temperature above 15 C.

1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the

damaged surface. Then remove the tape to

remove any loose paint.

2. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine

brush or a matchstick. Apply paint using a

brush once the primer is dry.

3. For scratches, proceed as above, but

mask around the damaged area to protect

the undamaged paintwork.

4. After a few days, polish the touched-up

areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount

of lapping paste.

NOTE

If the stone chip has not penetrated to the bare metal and there is an undamaged col- our coat, you can paint straight after clean- ing the damaged surface.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 262

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Type designations

06

263

Decal location

G 03

20 87

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 263

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Type designations

06

264

Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle

identification and engine numbers can facili-

tate all contact with an authorised Volvo dealer

regarding the car and when ordering spare

parts and accessories.

Type designation, vehicle identification

number, maximum permissible weights,

codes for colour and upholstery and type

approval number.

Label for parking heater.

The engine oil decal specifies oil grade and

viscosity.

Engine type designation, component and

serial number.

Gearbox type designation and serial num-

ber.

Manual gearbox

Automatic gearbox

Car's identification number. (VIN Vehicle

Identification Number)

Further information on the car is presented in

the registration document.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 264

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Specifications

06

265

Dimensions

G 01

74 03

Posi- tion in illus-

tration

Dimensions mm

A Wheelbase 2835

B Length 4851

C Load length, floor,

folded seat

1927

D Load length, floor 1094

E Height 1493

Posi- tion in illus-

tration

Dimensions mm

F Front track 1588

G Rear track 1585

H Width 1861

I Width including door

mirrors

2106

Weights

Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank

90% full and all fluids. The weight of passen-

gers and accessories, such as a towbar, load

carriers, space box etc. and towball load (when

a trailer is hitched, see table) influences the

payload and must not be included in the kerb

weight. Permitted weight (in addition to driver)

= Gross vehicle weight Kerb weight.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 265

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Specifications

06

266

WARNING

The car's driving characteristics change depending on how heavily it is loaded and how the load is distributed.

G 01

77 55

For information on decal location, see page 263.

Gross vehicle weight

Max. train weight (car+trailer)

Max. front axle load

Max. rear axle load

Equipment level

Max. load: See registration document.

Max. roof load: 100 kg.

Towing capacity and towball load

Model Gearbox Trailer weight with brake (kg) Towball load (kg)

All All 0 1200 50

2.0 MTX75 max. 1500 75

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 266

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Specifications

06

267

Model Gearbox Trailer weight with brake (kg) Towball load (kg)

2.0F MTX75 max. 1500 75

2.5FT Manual (M66) max. 1600 75

2.5FT Automatic (TF-80SC) max. 1800 75

2.5T Manual (M66) max. 1800 75

2.5T Automatic (TF-80SC) max. 1800 75

3.2 Automatic (TF-80SC)

Automatic AWD

max. 1800 75

T6 Automatic (TF80SC) AWD max. 2000 90

V8 Automatic (TF-80SC) max. 2000 90

2.0D MMT6 max. 1600 75

2.4D Manual (M66) max. 1600 75

2.4D Automatic (TF-80SC) max. 1800 75

D5 Manual (M66)

Manual AWD

max. 1600 75

D5 Automatic (TF-80SC)

Automatic AWD

max. 2000 90

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 267

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Specifications

06

268

Trailer weight without brake

(kg)

Towball load (kg)

max. 750 50

NOTE

The use of stabilising devices is recom- mended with trailers heavier than 1800 kg.

Engine specifications

Specification/Model 2.0 2.0F 2.5T 2.5FT 3.2 T6 V8

Engine designation B4204S3 B4204S4 B5254T6 B5254T8 B6324S B6304T2 B8444S

Output (kW/rpm) 107/6000 107/6000 147/4800 147/4800 175/6200 210/5600 232/5950

Output (hp/rpm) 145/6000 145/6000 200/4800 200/4800 238/6200 285/5600 315/5950

Torque (Nm/rpm) 190/4500 190/4500 300/1500

4500

300/1500

4500

320/3200 400/1500

4800

440/3950

No. of cylinders 4 4 5 5 6 6 8

Bore (mm) 87 87 83 83 84 82 94

Stroke (mm) 83.0 83.0 93.2 93.2 96 93.2 79.5

Swept volume (litres) 1.99 1.99 2,521 2,521 3,192 2,953 4,414

Compression ratio 10.8:1 10.8:1 9.0:1 9.0:1 10.8:1 9.3:1 10.4:1

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 268

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Specifications

06

269

Specification/Model 2.0D 2.4D D5

Engine designation D4204T D5244T5 D5244T4

Output (kW/rpm) 100/4000 120/4000 136/4000

Output (hp/rpm) 136/4000 163/4000 185/4000

Torque (Nm/rpm) 320/2000 340/1750 2750 400/2000 2750

No. of cylinders 4 5 5

Bore (mm) 85 81 81

Stroke (mm) 88.0 93.1 93.1

Swept volume (litres) 2.00 2.400 2.400

Compression ratio 18.5:1 17,3:1 17,3:1

Engine oil

Adverse driving conditions Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnor-

mally high oil temperature or oil consumption.

Check the oil level more frequently for long

journeys:

towing a caravan or trailer.

in mountainous regions.

at high speeds.

in temperatures colder than -30 C or hot- ter than +40 C

shorter driving distances (shorter than 10 km) at low temperatures (under 5 C).

This can produce abnormally high oil tempera-

ture or oil consumption.

Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse

driving conditions. It provides extra protection

for the engine.

Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.

IMPORTANT

In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact. An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil (see the engine compartment decal) for both filling and oil change, otherwise you

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 269

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Specifications

06

270

will risk affecting service life, starting cha- racteristics, fuel consumption and environ- mental impact. Volvo Car Corporation dis- claims all warranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used.

G 02

18 34

Viscosity chart

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 270

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Specifications

06

271

Oil decal

Engine variant Filling volume between MIN MAX (litres)

Volume A

(litres)

G 03

20 79

The following applies when this adjacent oil

decal is fitted in the car's engine compartment.

For location see page 220.

Oil grade: WSS-M2C913-B

Viscosity: SAE 5W30

When driving under adverse conditions, use

ACEA A5/B5 SAE 0W-30.

2.0D D4204T 2.0 5.5

A Including filter change

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 271

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Specifications

06

272

Oil decal

Engine variant Volume between MIN and MAX (litres)

Volume

(litres)

G 03

20 78

The following applies when the adjacent decal

is fitted in the car's engine compartment. For

information on decal location, see page 220.

Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5

Viscosity: SAE 0W30

2.0F B4204S4 0.75 4.3

2.5FT B5254T8 1.3 5.5

2.0 B4204S3 0.75 0.75

2.5T B5254T6 1.3 5.5

3.2 B6324S 1.2 7.4

T6 B6304T2 1.2 7.4

V8 B8444S 1.1 7.0

D5 D5244T4 1.5 6.0

2.4D D5244T5 1.5 6.0

Other fluids and lubricants

Fluid System Volume (litres) Prescribed grade

Gearbox oil Manual (M66) 2.0 MTF 97309

Gearbox oil Automatic (TF-80SC) 7.0 JWS 3309

Gearbox oil MMT6 BOT 130

Gearbox oil MTX75 1.9 BOT 130

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 272

henrikrosenqvist

1.7

06 Maintenance and specifications

Specifications

06

273

Fluid System Volume (litres) Prescribed grade

Coolant Petrol engine 2.0 Coolant with corrosion inhibitor

mixed with water A, see packaging. Petrol engine 2.0F

Petrol engine 2.5FT 9.0

Petrol engine 3.2 8.9

Petrol engine 2.5T 9.0

Petrol engine T6 8.9

Petrol engine V8 10.2

Diesel engine 2.0D

Air conditioning B - - Oil: PAG

Refrigerant: R134a (HFC134a)

Brake fluid - 0.6 DOT 4+

Power steering - 1.2 Power steering fluid WSS

M2C204-A2 or equivalent product.

Washer fluid - 6.5

C

Use a washer antifreeze recom-

mended by Volvo, mixed with

water.

A Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1. B May vary depending on the engine variant. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop for the exact information. C Cars without headlamp washing

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 273

henrikrosenqvist

7.55

7.55

9.15

12.65Diesel engine D5/2.4D

4.5

06 Maintenance and specifications

Specifications

06

274

NOTE

Under normal driving conditions the gear- box oil does not need changing during its service life. However, it may be necessary under adverse driving conditions, see page 269.

Consumption, emissions and volume

Model Engine Gearbox Consumption (litre/100 km)

Emissions of car- bon dioxide(CO2,

g/km)

Tank volume (litres)

2.0 B4204S3 Manual 5-speed

(MTX75)

8.3 199 approx. 70

2.0F A B4204S4 Manual 5-speed

(MTX75)

8.3 199 approx. 70

2.5FTA B5254T8 Manual M66 219 approx. 70

2.5FTA B5254T8 Automatic (TF-80SC) 10.1 241 approx. 70

2.5T B5254T6 Manual (M66) 9.3 223 approx. 70

2.5T B5254T6 Automatic (TF-80SC) 10.2 244 approx. 70

3.2 B6324S Automatic (TF-80SC) 246 approx. 70

3.2 B6324S Automatic (TF80SC)

AWD Exec. 10.9

255

Exec. 259

approx. 70

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 274

henrikrosenqvist

10.3

10.7

9.2

06 Maintenance and specifications

Specifications

06

275

Model Engine Gearbox Consumption (litre/100 km)

Emissions of car- bon dioxide(CO2,

g/km)

Tank volume (litres)

T6 B6304T2 Automatic (TF80SC)

AWD

267 approx. 70

V8 B8444S Automatic (TF-80SC) 11.9 284 approx. 70

2.0D D4204T MMT6 151 approx. 70

D5 D5244T4 Manual (M66) 169 approx. 70

D5 D5244T4 Automatic (TF-80SC) 7.3 194 approx. 70

D5 D5244T4 Manual (M66) AWD 188 approx. 70

D5 D5244T4 Automatic (TF80SC)

AWD

212 approx. 70

2.4D D5244T5 Manual (M66) 169 approx. 70

2.4D D5244T5 Automatic (TF-80SC) 7.3 194 approx. 70

A Flexifuel can be driven on any 95 octane unleaded petrol, or bioethanol E85, as well as all possible mixtures of these two fuels. The car consumes approx. 40% more E85 which has a lower energy content.

Fuel consumption and emissions of

carbon dioxide Official fuel consumption figures are based on

a standard driving cycle in accordance with EU

Directive 80/1268comb.

The manner in which the car is driven, and

other non-technical factors affect fuel con-

sumption. For more information, see page 9.

Electrical system

12 volt system with a voltage-regulated alter-

nator. Single pole system in which the chassis

and engine block are used as conductors. The

negative terminal is connected to the chassis.

IMPORTANT

If the battery is replaced, replace it with a battery of the same cold start capacity and reserve capacity as the original (see the decal on the battery).

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 275

henrikrosenqvist

11.2

5.7

6.4

7.1

8.0

6.4

06 Maintenance and specifications

Specifications

06

276

Performance, battery

Engine 2.5T, 2.5FT 2.0, 2.0F, 3.0T, 3.2 V8 2.0D, D5, 2.4D

Voltage (V) 12 12 12 12

Cold start capacity (A) 520 800 520 700 600-800 700

Reserve capacity (min) 100 150 100 135 120-150 135

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 276

henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Type approval

06

277

Remote control system

Country

A, B, CY, CZ, D, DK,

E, EST, F, FIN, GB,

GR, H, I, IRL, L, LT,

LV, M, NL, P, PL, S,

SK, SLO

A

IS, LI, N, CH

HR

ROK Delphi 2003-07-15,

Germany R-

LPD1-03-0151

BR

RC

CCAB06LP1940T4

A Delphi hereby certifies that this remote control system con- forms to the essential characteristic requirements and other relevant regulations of directive 1999/5/EC.

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 277

henrikrosenqvist

07 Alphabetical Index

07

278

A

ACC Adaptive cruise control................. 155

Active Bi-Xenon Lights............................ 79

Active chassis FOUR-C........................ 153

Adaptation................................................. 98

Adapting driving characteristics.............. 153

Adaptive cruise control............................ 155

fault tracing......................................... 159

radar sensor........................................ 158

Adaptive cruise control fault tracing........ 159

Additional heater...................................... 132

Additional heater (Diesel)......................... 132

Adjusting headlamp pattern...................... 83

83

Bi-Xenon headlamp........................... 83

84

Adjusting the steering wheel...................... 77

Airbag

activating/deactivating, PACOS........... 20

deactivating/activating......................... 20

driver's and front passenger side......... 18

Air conditioning........................................ 126

general................................................ 121

Air conditioning, AC................................. 126

Air distribution.................................. 123, 127

Air vents................................................... 123

Alarm.......................................................... 55

alarm indicator...................................... 55

alarm signals......................................... 55

arming................................................... 55

checking the alarm............................... 42

deactivating.......................................... 55

deactivating a triggered alarm.............. 55

reduced alarm level.............................. 56

temporary disarming of the alarm........ 56

testing the alarm system...................... 56

Allergy and asthma inducing sub-

stances.................................................... 122

All-wheel drive, AWD............................... 104

All Wheel Drive (AWD).............................. 104

Approach light, duration............................ 83

Audio

headphones socket............................ 134

rear control panel................................ 134

settings............................................... 135

surround............................................. 133

Audio system........................................... 133

functions............................................. 135

overview.............................................. 133

Audio volume

phone.................................................. 188

phone/media player............................ 188

ring signal, phone............................... 188

AUTO

climate control settings...................... 125

Automatic car washes............................. 259

Automatic gearbox.................................. 101

manual gear positions (Geartronic)..... 101

towing and recovery........................... 213

Automatic locking...................................... 50

Automatic relocking................................... 50

AUX.......................................................... 133

AWD, All-wheel drive............................... 104

B

Backrest..................................................... 71

front seat, lowering............................... 71

Backrest rear seat, lowering...................... 73

Battery..................................................... 232

maintenance....................................... 232

remote control key/PCC....................... 46

start assistance..................................... 99

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 278

henrikrosenqvist

halogen headlamp...............................

active Bi-Xenon headlamps...............

07 Alphabetical Index

07

279

symbols on the battery....................... 232

warning symbols................................. 232

Bioethanol E85......................................... 202

Blind spot (BLIS)...................................... 178

Blind Spot Information System, BLIS...... 178

Bluetooth

handsfree............................................ 186

mute microphone............................... 188

transfer call to mobile......................... 188

Bonnet, opening...................................... 218

Booster cushion

folding up.............................................. 33

lowering................................................ 32

Booster cushion, integrated...................... 32

Boot lid

locking/unlocking.................................. 51

Brake and clutch fluid.............................. 221

Brake light.................................................. 80

Brakes...................................................... 105

Anti-lock braking system, ABS........... 105

brake light............................................. 80

brake system...................................... 105

electric parking brake......................... 107

Emergency brake assistance, EBA..... 105

80

filling brake fluid.................................. 222

symbols in the combined instrument

panel................................................... 105

Built-in phone.......................................... 191

Bulbs, see Lighting.................................. 223

C

Calls

functions during a call................ 191, 192

incoming..................................... 187, 191

operation..................................... 187, 191

volume in phone................................. 192

waiting................................................ 192

Call waiting.............................................. 192

Camera sensor........................................ 166

Car care................................................... 259

Car care, leather upholstery.................... 261

Cargo area

bag holder........................................... 205

loading................................................ 204

load retaining eyelets.......................... 204

mat...................................................... 185

Car upholstery......................................... 261

Car wash.................................................. 259

Catalytic converter................................... 201

recovery.............................................. 213

Centre console......................................... 116

Chassis settings....................................... 153

Checking and topping up the coolant..... 221

Children..................................................... 29

child safety locks.................................. 33

child seats and side airbags................. 22

location in the car................................. 29

safety.................................................... 29

Child safety locks...................................... 54

Child seat................................................... 29

Child seats................................................. 29

ISOFIX fixture system for child seats. . . 33

recommended...................................... 30

size classes for child seats with the ISO-

FIX fixture system................................. 34

upper mounting points for child seats.. 36

Cigarette lighter socket............................ 183

front seat............................................. 184

rear seat.............................................. 184

Cleaning

automatic car washes......................... 259

car wash............................................. 259

rims..................................................... 260

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 279

henrikrosenqvist

Emergency brake light, EBL.................

07 Alphabetical Index

07

280

seatbelts............................................. 261

upholstery........................................... 261

Clean Zone Interior.................................. 122

Climate control........................................ 121

general................................................ 121

sensors............................................... 121

Clock

analogue............................................... 69

Clock, setting............................................. 67

Collision..................................................... 28

Collision warning..................................... 164

Collision warning system

radar sensor................................ 158, 164

Collision Warning with Auto Brake*......... 164

Colour code, paint................................... 262

Combined instrument panel.................... 118

Comfort inside the passenger compart-

ment......................................................... 182

Compass.................................................. 151

calibration........................................... 151

setting the zone.................................. 151

Condensation in headlamps.................... 259

Controls

centre console.................................... 116

Crash, see Collision................................... 28

Cruise control.......................................... 154

D

Deadlocks.................................................. 52

deactivation.......................................... 52

temporary deactivation......................... 52

Defroster.................................................. 126

Diesel....................................................... 202

Diesel particle filter.................................. 203

Direction indicators.................................... 81

Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor... 103

Display lighting.......................................... 78

Distance Alert.......................................... 161

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II.................... 133

Door mirrors............................................... 91

Driveable punctured tyres........................ 247

Driver Alert Control.................................. 169

Driver Alert System.................................. 169

Driving...................................................... 198

cooling system.................................... 198

with the boot lid open......................... 198

with trailer........................................... 208

Driving in water........................................ 198

Driving with a trailer

towball load........................................ 265

towing capacity.................................. 265

DSTC, see also Stability control system.. 152

E

ECC, electronic climate control............... 124

Economical driving.................................. 198

ECO pressure.......................................... 254

Electrical socket

cargo area........................................... 184

front seat............................................. 184

rear seat.............................................. 184

Electric parking brake.............................. 107

low battery voltage............................. 107

releasing automatically....................... 108

releasing manually.............................. 108

Emergency calls....................................... 191

Emergency equipment

warning triangle.................................. 207

Emergency puncture repair..................... 250

Emissions of carbon dioxide................... 203

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 280

henrikrosenqvist

07 Alphabetical Index

07

281

Engine

overheating......................................... 208

starting.................................................. 95

Engine block heater................................... 97

Engine compartment

coolant................................................ 221

oil........................................................ 220

overview.............................................. 218

power steering fluid............................ 222

Engine oil......................................... 219, 269

adverse driving conditions.................. 269

capacities........................................... 269

filter..................................................... 220

oil grade.............................................. 269

Error messages

Driver Alert Control............................. 170

Lane Departure Warning..................... 173

see Messages and symbols............... 159

Error messages in BLIS........................... 180

Error messages in Distance Alert............ 162

Error messages in the Adaptive cruise con-

trol............................................................ 159

Expectant mothers, seatbelt...................... 15

External dimensions................................ 265

F

Fan........................................................... 125

Fault tracing for the camera sensor......... 167

First aid equipment.................................. 207

Flexifuel...................................................... 97

adaptation............................................. 98

Floor mats................................................ 183

Fog lamp

front...................................................... 80

Fog lamps

rear........................................................ 80

Fog lamps, on/off....................................... 80

Foot brake................................................ 105

FOUR-C Active chassis........................ 153

Front seat

76

lumbar................................................... 75

massage............................................... 75

Fuel.......................................................... 201

fuel consumption................................ 203

fuel economy.............................. 254, 257

fuel filter.............................................. 203

Fuse box.................................................. 235

glovebox............................................. 239

Fuses....................................................... 235

box in cargo area................................ 242

changing............................................. 235

general................................................ 235

relay/fuse box in engine compart-

ment.................................................... 236

Fuse table

fuses in cargo area............................. 242

fuses in engine compartment............. 237

G

Gearbox................................................... 100

automatic............................................ 101

manual................................................ 100

Gear selector inhibitor............................. 103

Gear selector inhibitor, mechanical disen-

gagement................................................. 103

Geartronic................................................ 101

Glass........................................................ 185

laminated/reinforced............................. 89

Global opening........................................ 122

Glovebox.................................................. 183

51

Gross vehicle weight............................... 265

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 281

henrikrosenqvist

adjusting front - rear.............................

locking.................................................

07 Alphabetical Index

07

282

H

Hazard warning flashers............................ 81

HBS Heart Beat Sensor.......................... 43

Headlamp levelling.................................... 78

Active Bi-Xenon headlamps............... 78

Bi-Xenon headlamps.......................... 78

Headlamp pattern, adjusting..................... 83

Headlamps............................................... 223

Headphones socket................................. 134

Head restraint

centre seat, rear.................................... 73

lowering................................................ 73

Heated washer nozzles.............................. 88

Heating.................................................... 125

rearview and door mirrors.................... 92

rear window.......................................... 92

seats................................................... 125

High engine temperature......................... 208

High-pressure headlamp washing............. 88

HomeLink EU........................................ 110

Home safe lighting..................................... 82

Hoot........................................................... 77

Horn........................................................... 77

I

IAQS Interior Air Quality System........... 122

IC Inflatable Curtain................................ 24

IDIS Intelligent Driver Information Sys-

tem........................................................... 193

Ignition keys............................................... 70

IMEI number............................................ 194

Immobiliser................................................ 40

Indicator lamps, PCC................................. 42

Information and warning symbols............. 64

Information button, PCC............................ 42

Information displays.................................. 63

Instrument lighting, see Lighting................ 78

Instrument overview

left-hand drive....................................... 60

right-hand drive.................................... 62

Instruments and controls........................... 60

Interior lighting, see Lighting..................... 81

Interior rearview mirror............................... 92

automatic dimming............................... 92

Intermittent wiping..................................... 87

J

Jack......................................................... 248

K

Kerb weight.............................................. 265

Key............................................................. 40

Key blade................................................... 43

Keyless drive........................................ 48, 95

Keyless start (keyless drive)................. 48, 95

Keylock.................................................... 103

Keypad in the steering

wheel.................................. 77, 116, 154, 191

Key positions............................................. 70

L

Laminated glass......................................... 89

Lamps, see Lighting................................ 223

Lane Departure Control........................... 172

Leather upholstery, washing instructions 261

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 282

henrikrosenqvist

07 Alphabetical Index

07

283

Lighting.................................................... 223

Active Bi-Xenon Lights, ABL.............. 79

approach light, duration....................... 83

automatic lighting, passenger compart-

ment...................................................... 82

bulbs, specifications........................... 229

controls................................................. 81

display lighting...................................... 78

front fog lamps..................................... 80

headlamp levelling................................ 78

home safe lighting................................ 82

in passenger compartment................... 81

instrument lighting................................ 78

main/dipped beam............................... 78

position/parking lamps......................... 79

rear fog lamp........................................ 80

Lighting, bulb replacement...................... 223

cargo area........................................... 228

courtesy lighting................................. 228

dipped beam halogen......................... 224

direction indicators............................. 225

fog lamp.............................................. 226

226

main beam Active Bi-Xenon............... 225

main beam Bi-Xenon.......................... 225

main beam halogen............................ 224

number plate lighting.......................... 227

parking lamps..................................... 225

side marker lamps.............................. 226

vanity mirror........................................ 228

Light switches............................................ 78

Loading

general................................................ 204

load retaining eyelets.......................... 204

roof load............................................. 206

Locking/unlocking

inside.................................................... 50

tailgate.................................................. 41

Locks

automatic locking................................. 50

boot lid.................................................. 51

Locking................................................. 50

unlocking.............................................. 50

M

Main/dipped beam, see Lightning............. 78

Maintenance

rustproofing........................................ 260

Making calls..................................... 187, 191

Manual gearbox....................................... 100

towing and recovery........................... 213

Manual gear positions (Geartronic).......... 101

Massage

front seat............................................... 75

Memory function in seats.......................... 72

Menus and messages.............................. 116

Messages and symbols

167

Distance Alert..................................... 162

Driver Alert Control............................. 170

Lane Departure Warning..................... 173

Messages and symbols in the Adaptive

cruise control........................................... 159

Messages in BLIS.................................... 180

Messages in the combined instrument

panel........................................................ 119

Messages in the information display....... 152

Meters in the combined instrument panel

fuel gauge............................................. 64

speedometer......................................... 64

tachometer........................................... 64

Misting..................................................... 126

attending to the windows................... 121

condensation in headlamps............... 259

remove with the air vents................... 127

timer function...................................... 126

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 283

henrikrosenqvist

lamp housing, rear..............................

Collision Warning with Auto Brake.....

07 Alphabetical Index

07

284

Mobile phone

connect............................................... 189

handsfree............................................ 186

register phone..................................... 186

MY KEY.................................................... 134

O

Oil, see also Engine oil............................. 269

Oil level low.............................................. 220

Overheating............................................. 208

P

PACOS....................................................... 20

PACOS, switch.......................................... 20

Paintwork

colour code......................................... 262

damage and touch-up........................ 262

Panel lighting............................................. 78

Panic function............................................ 41

Parking assistance................................... 175

parking assistance sensors................ 177

Parking brake........................................... 107

Parking heater.......................................... 129

battery and fuel................................... 129

parking on a hill.................................. 129

time setting......................................... 130

Particle filter............................................. 203

Passenger compartment......................... 182

Passenger compartment filter................. 122

PCC Personal Car Communicator

functions............................................... 41

range............................................... 42, 43

Petrol grade............................................. 201

Phone

built-in, overview................................ 191

connect............................................... 189

handsfree............................................ 186

incoming calls..................................... 187

making calls........................................ 187

messages........................................... 193

on/off.................................................. 191

phone book......................................... 189

phone book, shortcut......................... 189

receiving a call.................................... 188

register phone..................................... 186

ring signal........................................... 192

SIM card............................................. 194

Phone book............................................. 193

Pinch protection, sunroof.......................... 94

Polishing.................................................. 260

Position/parking lamps.............................. 79

Power seat................................................. 71

Power sunroof........................................... 93

Power windows......................................... 89

Privacy locking........................................... 45

Puncture, see Tyres................................. 248

Putting calls on hold................................ 192

R

Radar sensor........................................... 155

limitations........................................... 158

Rain sensor................................................ 87

Rear bulbs

location............................................... 227

Rear control panel

audio system...................................... 134

Rearview and door mirrors

compass............................................. 151

door...................................................... 91

electrically retractable........................... 91

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 284

henrikrosenqvist

07 Alphabetical Index

07

285

heating.................................................. 92

interior................................................... 92

Rear window, defrosting............................ 92

Recirculation............................................ 126

Recommendations during driving............ 198

Recommended child seats, table.............. 30

Recovery.................................................. 214

Refrigerant............................................... 122

Refrigerator compartment....................... 185

Refuelling................................................. 200

fuel cap............................................... 200

fuel filler flap, electrical opening......... 200

fuel filler flap, manual opening............ 200

refuelling............................................. 200

Relay/fuse box: see Fuses....................... 235

Remote control

programmable.................................... 110

Remote control, see Remote control key. . 40

Remote control key.................................... 40

battery................................................... 41

battery replacement.............................. 46

detachable key blade........................... 40

functions............................................... 41

range..................................................... 42

Remote control system, type approval.... 277

Resetting the door mirrors......................... 91

Resetting the power windows................... 90

Retractable power door mirrors................. 91

Reverse gear inhibitor.............................. 101

five-speed........................................... 100

Rims

cleaning.............................................. 260

Rustproofing............................................ 260

S

Safety mode............................................... 28

Seat, see Seats.......................................... 71

Seatbelt

rear seat................................................ 15

seatbelt tensioner................................. 16

Seatbelt reminder...................................... 15

Seatbelts.................................................... 14

Seats.......................................................... 71

head restraints, rear.............................. 73

heating................................................ 125

lowering the front backrest................... 71

lowering the rear backrest.................... 73

power seats.......................................... 71

ventilated front seats.......................... 124

Service programme................................. 218

Set time interval....................................... 161

Side airbags............................................... 22

Signal input, external............................... 133

SIM card.................................................. 194

SIPS bag decal....................................... 23

SIPS bags.................................................. 22

Ski hatch.................................................. 205

Soot filter................................................. 203

SOOT FILTER FULL................................. 203

Spare wheel............................................. 248

248

Spin control............................................. 152

Spin control function............................... 152

SRS AIRBAG........................................ 18, 19

SRS system............................................... 17

switch................................................... 20

SST Self Supporting run flat Tyres....... 247

Stability and traction control system....... 152

Stability system........................................ 152

Stains....................................................... 261

Start assistance......................................... 99

Steering force, speed related.................. 153

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 285

henrikrosenqvist

temporary spare................................

07 Alphabetical Index

07

286

Steering force level, see Steering force... 153

Steering lock.............................................. 96

Steering wheel........................................... 77

keypad.................. 77, 116, 133, 154, 191

keypad, adaptive cruise control......... 156

steering wheel adjustment.................... 77

Stone chips and scratches...................... 262

Storage compartment.............................. 185

Storage spaces in the passenger compart-

ment......................................................... 182

Sun blind.................................................... 90

Sunroof

opening and closing............................. 93

pinch protection.................................... 94

sunscreen............................................. 94

ventilation position................................ 93

Sunscreen, sunroof.................................... 94

Surround.................................................. 133

Symbols................................................... 152

indicator symbols................................. 64

information symbols............................. 64

warning symbols................................... 64

Symbols and messages

Collision Warning with Auto Brake..... 167

Distance Alert..................................... 162

Driver Alert Control............................. 170

Lane Departure Warning..................... 173

Symbols and messages in the Adaptive

cruise control........................................... 159

T

Tailgate

locking/unlocking.................................. 41

Temperature

actual temperature............................. 121

Temperature control................................ 125

Testing the alarm system........................... 56

Timer........................................................ 126

Tools........................................................ 248

Total airing function........................... 42, 122

Towball

installation........................................... 210

removal............................................... 212

Towbar, see Towing equipment.............. 209

Towing..................................................... 213

towing eye.......................................... 213

Towing capacity....................................... 265

Towing equipment................................... 209

specifications...................................... 210

Towing eye............................................... 213

TPMS Tyre Pressure Monitoring........... 246

Trailer....................................................... 208

cable................................................... 208

driving with a trailer............................ 208

Transmission............................................ 100

Trip computer.......................................... 149

Trip meter.................................................. 67

Type approved, remote control system... 277

Type designation..................................... 263

Tyres

direction of rotation............................ 244

driving characteristics......................... 244

maintenance....................................... 244

pressure.............................................. 254

puncture repair................................... 250

specifications...................................... 253

speed ratings...................................... 254

tread wear indicators.......................... 245

tyre pressure monitoring..................... 246

winter tyres......................................... 245

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 286

henrikrosenqvist

07 Alphabetical Index

07

287

U

Unlocking

from the inside...................................... 50

from the outside................................... 50

V

Vanity mirror....................................... 82, 184

Ventilation................................................ 123

Vibration damper..................................... 209

W

Warning lamp

adaptive cruise control....................... 155

collision warning system.................... 164

stability and traction control system. . 152

Warning lamps

airbags SRS.......................................... 65

alternator not charging......................... 65

fault in brake system............................ 65

low oil pressure..................................... 65

parking brake applied........................... 65

seatbelt reminder.................................. 65

warning................................................. 65

Warning sound

collision warning system.................... 164

Warning symbol, AIRBAG system............. 17

Warning triangle....................................... 207

Washer fluid, filling................................... 231

Washer nozzles, heated............................. 88

Washers

washer fluid, filling.............................. 231

windscreen........................................... 88

Water and dirt-repellent coating................ 89

Water-repellent surface, cleaning............ 260

Waxing..................................................... 260

Weights

kerb weight......................................... 265

Wheels

changing............................................. 248

installation........................................... 249

rims..................................................... 245

snow chains........................................ 246

spare wheel........................................ 248

Wheels and tyres..................................... 244

Whiplash injury........................................... 25

Whiplash injury, WHIPS............................. 25

WHIPS

child seat/booster cushion................... 25

whiplash injury...................................... 25

Windows, rearview and door mirrors......... 89

Windscreen washing.................................. 88

Windscreen wipers.................................... 87

rain sensor............................................ 87

Winter driving........................................... 199

Winter tyres.............................................. 245

Wiper blades............................................ 230

changing............................................. 230

cleaning.............................................. 230

service position................................... 230

Wipers and washing.................................. 87

S80 (Y286); 10; 3 2008-03-27T18:53:23+01:00; Page 287

henrikrosenqvist

07 Alphabetical Index

07

288

S80 (Y286); 10;

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the S80 Volvo works, you can view and download the Volvo S80 2009 Owners Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Volvo S80 as well as other Volvo manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Volvo S80. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Volvo S80 2009 Owners Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Volvo S80 2009 Owners Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Volvo S80 2009 Owners Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Volvo S80 2009 Owners Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Volvo S80 2009 Owners Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.